JP6926055B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Active display corresponding to the variable display during execution after executing the common effect as a notice effect to notify or suggest to the player that the reach effect may be executed or the expectation of big hit is high. There have been proposed a gaming machine that executes a success effect that changes the display mode of a special image including the above, and a failure effect that does not change the display mode of the special image after executing a common effect (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2018-1030

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement in the effect when the failure effect is executed as the advance notice effect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the gaming interest.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information,
Corresponding display means capable of displaying correspondence display (for example, hold display) based on hold information stored in the hold storage means, and
A change effect executing means (for example, FIG. 10-3, FIG. 10-5, FIG. 10-10, FIG. 10-11, etc.) capable of executing a change effect (for example, a hold change effect) that changes the mode of the corresponding display.
The first suggestion effect execution means (for example, FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4) capable of executing the first suggestion effect (for example, a genuine suggestion effect) suggesting that the change effect is executed and the mode of the corresponding display is changed. , Fig. 10-8 to Fig. 10-11, etc.)
A second suggestion effect execution means (for example, FIGS. 10-1 to 10-) capable of executing a second suggestion effect (for example, a Gase suggestion effect) suggesting that the change effect is not executed and the mode of the corresponding display does not change. 4. Fig. 10-8 to Fig. 10-10, Fig. 10-12, etc.)
With
The corresponding display includes at least a first display mode (for example, the first mode) and a second display mode different from the first display mode (for example, the second mode).
The second suggestion effect execution means is
The second suggestion in any one of a plurality of types of production modes including at least a first production mode (for example, a retreat mode) and a second production mode different from the first production mode (for example, a defeat mode). The effect can be performed (eg, FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, 10-9, 10-10, 10-12, etc.).
When the corresponding display is displayed in the second display mode, the second suggestive effect is displayed in the second effect mode at a higher rate than when the corresponding display is displayed in the first display mode. executable der Ri (e.g., Fig. 10-9),
When the second suggestion effect execution means executes the second suggestion effect in the first effect mode, the advantageous state is obtained based on the variable display corresponding to the corresponding display that is the target of the second suggestion effect. A variable display corresponding to the corresponding display that is the target of the second suggestion effect when the second suggestion effect execution means executes the second suggestion effect in the second effect mode. Different from the expectation controlled to the advantageous state based on
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the second suggestion effect is executed, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode of the second suggestion effect, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
When the corresponding display is displayed in the second display mode, the corresponding display includes an additional image (for example, defense character image AK1 or the like) (for example, FIG. 10-1).
When the corresponding display is displayed in the second display mode, the second suggestion effect means executes the second suggestive effect targeting the corresponding display in the second display mode. The second suggestion effect can be performed in a manner that acts on the additional image (for example, FIG. 10-12).
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(3) In any of the game machines (1) to (2) above,
When the second suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode, the second suggestion effect execution means can execute the second suggestion effect in a mode partially common to the first suggestion effect. (For example, FIG. 10-1, FIG. 10-2, FIG. 10-10, FIG. 10-11, etc.).
There are a plurality of types of the common modes (for example, FIG. 10-9).
Depending on the type of the common aspect, the ratio of which of the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect is executed differs (for example, FIG. 10-9).
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the types of common modes and improve the game entertainment.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above,
When the second suggestion effect execution means executes the second suggestion effect in the second effect mode, the second suggestion effect is executed in the first effect mode. It can be executed in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize (for example, FIG. 10-2, FIG. 10-11, FIG. 10-12, etc.).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, when the second suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode, the second suggestion effect is executed in the first effect mode. It can be easier for the player to recognize than sometimes.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the feature part 048AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table which concerns on the feature part 048AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table which concerns on the feature part 048AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table which concerns on the feature part 048AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table which concerns on the feature part 048AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table which concerns on the feature part 048AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table which concerns on the feature part 048AK. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state which concerns on a feature part 048AK. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 1st special figure in the probability variation state which concerns on a feature part 048AK. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 2nd special figure in a normal state or a time saving state which concerns on a feature part 048AK. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 2nd special figure in the probability variation state which concerns on a feature part 048AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type determination table which concerns on the feature part 048AK. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the game control main process which concerns on a feature part 048AK. It is a flowchart which shows the random value value determination process at the time of winning which concerns on the feature part 048AK. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing which concerns on a feature part 048AK. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display result determination module which concerns on the feature part 048AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in the look-ahead notice setting process which concerns on a feature part 048AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the determination ratio such as whether or not the look-ahead chance eye is executed which concerns on a feature part 048AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process which concerns on a feature part 048AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the non-reach loss stop symbol and the like determination processing which concerns on a feature part 048AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the predetermined display determination processing which concerns on a feature part 048AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of whether or not the predetermined display is executed which concerns on feature part 048AK, and the determination ratio thereof. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the type of the predetermined display and its determination ratio concerning the feature part 048AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the final variation effect setting process which concerns on a feature part 048AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example in the case where the predetermined display which concerns on the feature part 048AK and the count value display for each type are performed. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the modification which concerns on the feature part 048AK. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the modification which concerns on the feature part 048AK. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the modification which concerns on the feature part 048AK. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the modification which concerns on the feature part 048AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ending effect processing which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ending effect start setting process which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of whether or not the setting suggestion effect which concerns on the feature part 063AK is executed, and the determination ratio thereof. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the execution mode of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on the feature part 063AK, and the determination ratio thereof. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ending effect operation control process with setting suggestion effect which concerns on feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in the variable display start setting process which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in the special figure hit waiting process which concerns on a feature part 063AK. It is a time chart which shows the execution period of the ending effect, etc. which concerns on feature part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation in the case where the ending effect and the like which concerns on the feature part 063AK are executed. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the screen display which concerns on the feature part 077AK. It is a timing chart of the suggestion effect which concerns on the feature part 077AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the pre-reading notice setting process which concerns on a feature part 077AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the storage area of the RAM 122 which concerns on a feature part 077AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the hold change effect determination table which concerns on the feature part 077AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final display mode determination table which concerns on a feature part 077AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the hold display change mode determination table which concerns on the feature part 077AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the suggestion effect determination table which concerns on a feature part 077AK. It is a figure which shows the structure example of the authenticity suggestion effect mode determination table which concerns on a feature part 077AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 077AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 077AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 077AK.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of on hold storage. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always maintained in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is suspended, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (although the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also called) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output voice) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). Along with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the recovery from the power failure has been performed or the recovery from the power failure is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, refer to the details. See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the look-ahead judgment, etc. is made to the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be changed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the jackpot game state is to be terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation was a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 048AK)
Next, the feature portion 048AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. As shown in FIG. 8-1, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame formed in a vertically long square frame shape, a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface, and a game. It is composed of a gaming machine frame (underframe) that supports and fixes the board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame, a glass door frame having a glass window can rotate between a door opening position that opens the front surface of the game machine frame and a door closing position that closes the front surface centering on the left side. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame is closed.

In addition, the pachinko / pachislot machine frame can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a pachinko / pachislot clerk into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it. It is not possible to open the door.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1, a first reserved storage display area 207SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 207SG005U are set at two positions on the left and right below the display area of the image display device 5. In the first hold storage display area 207SG005D and the second hold storage display area 207SG005U, a hold storage display for identifiablely displaying the hold storage number (special figure hold storage number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed. The left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is formed in the left game area 207SG002L where the game ball can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is a game. It is formed in the right gaming area 207SG002R where the ball can flow down.

The left game area 207SG002L is a game area in which a game ball launched relatively weakly (left-handed) by the operation of the ball striking handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 207SG002R is a left game area 207SG002L by the operation of the ball striking handle 30. This is a game area in which a (right-handed) game ball launched more strongly than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 207SG002L, and in the right game area 207SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 207SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10, and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

Although not shown, the main board 11 in the feature portion 048AK of the present embodiment is housed in the board case 207SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 207SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the like are used. A setting changeover switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value and an open sensor 207SG090 that detects the opening of a gaming machine frame are provided. The set value change state in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment is also a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is housed in the board case 207SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case 207SG201 so that the board case 207SG201 can be operated without opening the board case 207SG201.

Since the board case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the frame closed, and a predetermined door key is used. The operation becomes possible by opening the frame for the gaming machine. Further, since the lock switch 207SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 207SG051. Further, the lock switch 207SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by a setting key. Although the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, a display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value is arranged on the board case 207SG201. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 207SG201. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 is arranged in front of the board case 207SG201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame is opened. This is the front of the pachinko machine 1 and is different from the front of the pachinko machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the jackpot probability may change depending on the set value, and although the jackpot probability is constant, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state changes depending on the set value. It may be good (the same applies to the following feature part 063AK). Further, the set set value is transmitted from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side as a set value designation command (the same applies to the following feature unit 063AK).

8-2 (A) to 8-2 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as the display result determination table, individual display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , The display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 8-2 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 1) used when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1237 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-2 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 1) used when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1237 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-3 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 2) used when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1253 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 2) used when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1253 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 3) used when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1272 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probable change state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 3) used when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1272 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 is assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the game state is a probable change state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1292 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1292 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1317 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-6 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 5) used when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1317 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 6) used when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As described above, in each display result judgment table, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are set than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Probability to be determined (in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and the setting Compared to 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state. Then, the probability of being determined becomes high (in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1 / when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, the probability that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state. Is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the determination value becomes high.

In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 to 8-7, the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different according to each set value. Different (for example, if the set value is 1, the probability variation of the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability variation with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times. The jackpot probability multiplier in the state is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the jackpot probability multiplier in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value is constant (for example, 5 times). ) May be set.

Further, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, FIG. 8-2 (A), FIG. 8-3 (A), FIG. 8-4 (A), FIG. 8-5 (A), FIG. 8-6 (A), FIG. 8-7 ( As shown in A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure, there is a probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. It is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the first special regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, FIG. 8-2 (B), FIG. 8-3 (B), FIG. 8-4 (B), FIG. 8-5 (B), FIG. 8-6 (B), FIG. 8-7 ( As shown in B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, there is a probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. It is set to 1/100.

It should be noted that the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Further, the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" and the small hit gaming state is different according to the variable special map. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to the "big hit" and the "small hit" in each display result judgment table, as shown in FIG. 8-8, the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the display result determination table for the first special figure in the case, the range of the hit determination values from 1020-1237 is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. ..

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-9, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In addition, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 8-10, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-11, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the game state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the big hit judgment values are not included in the common numerical range. Numerical values within the range including the common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, in each display result determination table, the hit determination value of 1020 is used as a reference regardless of the game state and the set value. The judgment value included in the common numerical range or the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the hit judgment is made regardless of the game state and the set value. The variable display result is determined by using the determination value included in a continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) with the value 32767 as a reference as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Further, in each of these display result judgment tables, when the fluctuation special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is Same). Further, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value of the set value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as "big hit" (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to make A to big hit F). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-2 (A) to 8-7 (B) indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In the present embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability increases and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is more likely to be determined). The present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. Further, the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change. The game playability is not limited to this, and the game playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small while the small hit probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). ..

Further, when the game playability is changed according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (in order to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to a probability change state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

Next, the jackpot type in the feature portion 048AK of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 8-12. FIG. 8-12 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as the big hit type in the first special figure and the second special figure, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed after the end of the big hit game, and the big hit shifts to the high accuracy high base state. The jackpot types of A to jackpot F (also called probabilistic jackpot) are set. As shown in the figure, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, once a big hit is made, 100% probability variation control is performed. It should be noted that, in either or both of the first special figure and the second special figure, only the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state, and the big hit G (also referred to as non-probable variable big hit) shifts to the low probability high base state. The jackpot type of the jackpot H and the jackpot type of the jackpot H that the probability variation control continues (that is, does not end depending on the number of times) until the next jackpot may be set. In addition, there may be a jackpot type in which neither high-accuracy control nor time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game is completed.

The jackpot game state by "big hit A" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed eight times (so-called eight rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player (so-called two rounds). It is a so-called "sudden" jackpot). Further, the jackpot game state by "big hit D" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The big hit game state by the "big hit E" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit F" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player (so-called two rounds). It is a so-called "sudden" jackpot).

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control (probability variation state) executed after the end of the jackpot game states of "big hit A" to "big hit F" are performed a predetermined number of times after the end of the jackpot game state (features of the present embodiment). Part 048AK ends when the special figure game (100 times) is executed, or when the special figure game is entered into the big hit game state before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. Therefore, when a big hit occurs again, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state continuously occurs without going through the normal state, so-called consecutive villas. It becomes a state.

For example, when a big hit occurs, the ratio of determining the so-called sudden big hit such as the big hit C or the big hit F may be lowered in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, the ball ejection rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the ball ejection rate decreases as the set value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Just do it. In addition to this, the ratio of the jackpot type determined according to the set value may be different. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the ball output rate for the player. As described above, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result becomes a jackpot differs according to the set set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Next, the processing in the game control main processing in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-13 is a flowchart showing an example of processing in the game control main process performed in the game control main process executed by the CPU 103. The processing in the game control main processing is, for example, in the game control main processing shown in FIG. 3, after the interrupt is set to prohibit, the stack pointer is set, the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc. ), The setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like may be executed after the initial setting is performed.

When the processing in the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (Step S1A). Before the process of step S1A, a process of clearing the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed according to a predetermined condition may be performed.

When the clear switch is ON (step S1A; Yes), the RAM clear flag is set (step S2A) and the process proceeds to step S3A. When the clear switch is OFF (step S1A; No), step S2A The process proceeds to step S3A without executing the process of.

In step S3A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch is ON (step S3A). When the lock switch is ON (step S3A; Yes), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor is ON (step S4A). When the release sensor is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the lock switch ON and the gaming machine frame open (step S4A; Yes), is the RAM clear flag set? Whether or not it is determined (step S5A).

When the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A), the set value change process (step S6A) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to the process of step S8A. When the RAM clear flag is not set (step A5A; No), the set value confirmation process (step S7A) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to perform the process of step S8A. move on. If the lock switch is OFF (step S3A; No) or the release sensor is OFF (step S4A; No), the process proceeds to step S8A as it is.

The setting value change process is performed by turning on the lock switch and the clear switch while the gaming machine frame is open when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (powered off) and then restarted. This is the process to be performed. In the set value change process, a process of transmitting a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12, a process of updating the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 as a temporary set value based on the operation of the setting changeover switch, Depending on the state of the lock switch, a process of updating and storing a temporary set value as an actual set value at the address F000 in the RAM 102 and a process of transmitting a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed.

In the set value confirmation process, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on (the clear switch is off) with the gaming machine frame open. It is a process performed by doing. In the set value confirmation process, a process of transmitting a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12, a display of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is started on the display monitor, and the pachinko game machine 1 is provided. The process of outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall via a terminal board (not shown), the display or the like is terminated according to the state of the lock switch, and the setting is set for the effect control board 12. The process of sending the value confirmation end notification command is performed.

In the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the round indicator are lit from the start of each process, and the first hold indicator 25A, By starting the second hold display 25B and the blinking of the right-handed lamp, the player, the clerk of the game hall, etc., is changing or setting the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. It suffices if it is possible to recognize that the value is being confirmed. Further, the lighting pattern of the segment constituting the round display 1 may be any mode as long as it does not correspond to any of the big hits A to F shown. Further, the segments constituting the round display may be lit in different modes at the start of the set value change process and the start of the set value confirmation process.

In step S8A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared (whether or not the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time. (Step S8A). If the RAM clear flag is set (step S8A; Yes), the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed and then the process proceeds to step S10A. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step S8A; No), the RAM is cleared. The process proceeds to step S10A without executing the process (step S9A). Then, as another process, for example, depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 recovers whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start or in the state before the power failure (starts by a hot start). ), Perform processing according to each (step S10A), and end the processing in the game control main processing.

In the RAM clear processing, data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag is cleared by storing "00H" in an address other than the first address (F000) in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored. Processing is done. In the RAM clear processing, instead of clearing data other than the set value, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F000 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment). It is also possible to clear only the game information stored in (F003 or later) of ~ FXXX).

The process of step S10A includes a process of blinking all the segments constituting the display monitor for a period (for example, 5 seconds) of the cold start notification timer at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, only a part of the segments may be blinked, or at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor may be turned on. Further, in the processing in the game control main processing, for example, based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error), the recovery from the power failure during the setting change, and the like. A process of transmitting an error designation command according to an abnormality of the set value to the effect control board 12 may be included. Further, as a notification (error notification) of the occurrence of an abnormal setting value error or recovery from a power failure during setting change, the first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, and the fourth display that constitute the display monitor are displayed. A process of displaying "E." may be performed in each of the parts. Further, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and manages the game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer, and thereafter, the CPU 103 displays until the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off (until the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall). The occurrence notification of an error by the monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B may be executed.

According to this, when an abnormal set value is set or when the setting value is changed and the power is restored from the power failure, an error is caused by the display monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B. Since the occurrence notification of the above is executed, the clerk of the amusement park can recognize from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 that an error has occurred or that the pachinko machine 1 has recovered from the power failure while changing the set value. It becomes. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure while changing the set value can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. Become.

FIG. 8-14 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in the process of step S101 of FIG. 5 as a winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 048AK, the special symbol display result (variable display of the special symbol) is performed by the special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 5, FIG. 8-15) described later. The result) is set as "big hit" to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, and the special figure display result is set to "small hit" to determine whether to control to the small hit gaming state. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes this winning random value determination process at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). , It is determined whether or not it is determined that the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. .. As a result, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, at the start of the variable display. Before Then, as will be described later, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a look-ahead advance notice effect such as a hold display advance notice effect.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 8-14, the CPU 103 first checks the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 or the like, thereby causing the pachinko gaming machine 1 to perform. Identify the current gaming state (207SGS521). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

Following the processing of the 207SGS521, the CPU 103 refers to the first address in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 8-14 (B)) and specifies the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS522). Next, the special figure display result determination table according to the current game state, the start opening buffer value, and the set value is selected and set (207SGS524). After that, in the variable display result determination module (207SGS525) shown in FIG. 8-16, a process of determining whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing" is performed.

As shown in FIG. 8-16, in the variable display result determination module, the CPU 103 indicates a numerical value range of the jackpot determination value in the set special figure display result determination table and a random number value MR1 for determining the specified special figure display result. It is compared with the data (207SGS571), and it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (207SGS571). At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit".

When it is determined by the 207SGS572 that it is within the jackpot determination range (207SGS572; Y), it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot in the variable display (207SGS576). On the other hand, when it is determined by the 207SGS572 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not a jackpot in the variable display (207SGS572; N), the small hit determination in the set special figure display result determination table The numerical range of the value is compared with the numerical data indicating the specified random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result (207SGS573), and the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the predetermined small hit determination range. It is determined whether or not it is within (207SGS574).

When it is determined that the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (207SGS574; Y), it is determined that the numerical data is a small hit in the variable display (207SGS577). On the other hand, if it is determined by the 207SGS574 that it is not within the small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that the small hit is not achieved in the variable display (207SGS574; N), it is determined that the variable display is out of range (207SGS575). ).

Returning to FIG. 8-14 (A), it is confirmed whether or not the 207SGS575 determines that a big hit is achieved in the variable display (207SGS526), and when it is determined that the variable display does not result in a big hit (207SGS526; N), the variable display is displayed in the 207SGS525. If it is confirmed whether or not it is determined to be a small hit (207SGS527), and if it is determined that it is not a small hit, that is, if it is determined that the variable display is out of order (207SGS526; N), the variable display result is "out of order". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the above, is executed (207SGS527a), and whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state. (207SGS528).

When it is determined by the 207SGS526 that a big hit is obtained in the variable display (207SGS526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type and the big hit type determination table (207SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Further, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command in the case of jackpot A, a third symbol designation command in the case of jackpot B, and a fourth symbol designation command in the case of jackpot C. Execute the transmission setting of the symbol designation command, the fifth symbol designation command when it is a jackpot D, the sixth symbol designation command when it is a jackpot E, and the seventh symbol designation command when it is a jackpot F (207SGS534). ), Then, as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern, a jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the jackpot type is selected and set (207SGS535), and the process proceeds to 207SGS536.

Further, when the 207SGS527 determines that a small hit is obtained in the variable display (207SGS527; Y), the transmission setting of the eighth symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "small hit". (207SGS531), select and set the variation pattern determination table for small hits (207SGS532), and proceed to 207SGS536.

If the time reduction flag is not set in 207SGS528 (207SGS528; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set (207SGS529), and if the time reduction flag is set (207SGS528; Y). ), The deviation pattern determination table D is selected and set (207SGS530). The deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 2 or less. Further, the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the game state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

In this feature unit 048AK, in addition to these deviation pattern determination tables A and deviation pattern determination tables D, the deviation pattern determination used when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4 is determined. Table B and the deviation pattern determination table C used when the total number of pending storages is 5 or more are prepared in advance, but in the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach variation pattern is used. On the other hand, in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take, 1 to 450 when the set value 1 is 1, 1 to 430 when the set value is 2, and 1 to 1 when the set value is 3. 410, when the set value is 4, 1-390 is assigned, when the set value is 5, 1-370 is assigned, and when the set value is 6, 1-350 are assigned.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, for the non-reach variation pattern, the set value is 1 to 500 when the set value is 1 in the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. 2 is 1 to 480, 3 is 1 to 460, 4 is 1 to 440, 5 is 1 to 420, and 6 is 1 to 1. 400 are assigned to each.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C and the deviation pattern determination table D, when the set value is 1 in the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take for the non-reach variation pattern. 1 to 550, 1 to 530 when the set value is 2, 1 to 510 when the set value is 3, 1 to 490 when the set value is 4, 1 to 470 when the set value is 5, set. When the value is 6, 1 to 450 are assigned respectively.

On the other hand, in any of the deviation pattern determination tables, 701 to 997 of the range that the random value MR3 for dynamic pattern determination can take for the fluctuation pattern of super reach is assigned regardless of the set value. There is.

Therefore, in the 207SGS529, by determining the variation pattern using the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D, the non-reach and super reach determinations are determined by changing the number of reserved memories after the determination. Is always a non-reach or super-reach fluctuation pattern. Therefore, in the determination at the time of starting winning, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D. ..

After executing any of the processes of 207SGS529, 207SGS530, 207SGS532, and 207SGS535, the variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination are used to perform disturbance. The variation category according to the range of determination values including the numerical value MR3 is determined (207SGS536). In this feature unit 048AK, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (B), when at least the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode is "non-reach" in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. Variable category, variable display mode of "super reach", variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit), and "other" variable category. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the processing of 207SGS536 to the effect control board 12 (207SGS537), the random number value determination processing at the time of winning is completed. The symbol designation command and the variable category designation command are transmitted when the CPU 103 executes a command control process.

FIG. 8-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 8-15, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the number of second special symbol hold storage is “0” (207SGS541). The second special figure hold storage number is the number of hold storages of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of 207SGS541, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in 207SGS541 (207SGS541; N), it is set as the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 207SG151B corresponding to the hold number "1". , The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out and specified (207SGS542). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the processing of the 207SGS542, the second special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the second special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data in the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B is updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure hold storage unit 207SG151B are stored. The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (207SGS543).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designated buffer, to "2" (207SGS544), the process shifts to 207SGS549.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in 207SGS541 (207SGS541; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (207SGS545). The first special figure hold storage number is the number of hold storages of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the processing of the 207SGS545, the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 reads the first hold storage number count value stored in the first hold storage number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". good. As described above, the processing of the 207SGS545 is executed when the 207SGS541 determines that the second special figure reservation number is "0", and whether or not the first special figure reservation number is "0". Is determined. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

When the number of the first special figure hold storage is other than "0" in the 207SGS545 (207SGS545; N), the hold data is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A corresponding to the hold number "1". , The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out and specified (207SGS546). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the processing of 207SGS546, the first special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the first special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data of the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A is updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure hold storage unit 207SG151A are stored. The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (207SGS547).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designated buffer, to "1" (207SGS548), the process shifts to 207SGS549.

In the 207SGS549, for example, the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified by checking the states of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 or the like (207SGS549). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

Following the processing of the 207SGS549, the CPU 103 refers to the start address of the RAM 102 and specifies the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS550).

Next, the CPU 103 refers to the game information stored in the RAM 102, and determines whether or not the determination used set value is stored (207SGS551). When it is determined that the judgment used setting value is stored (207SGS551: Y), the setting value specified by 207SGS550 is compared with the stored judgment used setting value (207SGS552), and the specified setting value is compared. It is determined whether or not the determined used set value stored in the above is the same (207SGS553).

When it is determined in the 207SGS553 that the specified set value and the stored determination used set value are not the same (207SGS553: N), an error specification command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is issued to the effect control board 12. While making settings for transmission (207SGS554), a security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 (207SGS555), and a loop is performed. Enter the process. After that, since the CPU 103 does not execute other processing, the pachinko gaming machine is put into a non-gaming state (non-gaming state) by the loop processing. The error designation command is transmitted when the CPU 103 executes a command control process.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment is stored in the set value (determined used set value) referred to when the previous variable display is executed and the current start address of the RAM 102. When the set values are different, the management device of the game hall can recognize that the determined used set value and the set value currently stored at the start address of the RAM 102 are different, so that the pachinko game can be played. The security of the machine 1 can be improved.

In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to be in a non-gamable state by executing the loop processing and not executing other processing. The CPU 103 performs processing such as limiting the launch of the game ball, and not paying out the prize ball or variablely displaying the special symbol even if the game ball wins at each winning opening. By executing this, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be controlled to be in a non-gamable state.

Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the feature unit 048AK, it is regarded as an abnormality that the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different, and the abnormality is detected in the management device of the amusement park. Although the recognizable form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the display monitor 207SG029, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B are blinked, or " By displaying "E.", the abnormality may be notified to the player, the clerk of the game hall, or the like.

Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the feature unit 048AK, if the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different, the error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 and the game is played. The embodiment in which the output of the security signal to the field management device is executed only once is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmission of these error specification commands and the output of the security signal are illustrated. May be repeatedly executed at predetermined period intervals in the above-mentioned incapacitated state.

Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the feature unit 048AK, if the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 into a non-gamable state. Although the mode to be controlled has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 uses the pachinko game. It is not necessary to control the machine 1 so that it cannot be played.

Further, when the determination used setting value and the setting value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different and the CPU 103 does not control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the inoperable state, for example, the game hall. Only the output of the security signal to the management device of the above may be executed, or the set value stored in the start address of the RAM 102 may be reset and specified. When resetting the set value stored in the start address of the RAM 102, for example, the determined used set value may be stored in the start address of the RAM 102, which is the most disadvantageous value for the player (this). By setting 1) in the feature unit 048AK of the embodiment, it is possible to prevent the pachinko gaming machine 1 from being excessively advantageous to the player against the intention of the game hall.

Judgment in 207SGS551 When it is determined that the used set value is not stored, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts with a cold start and executes the first variable display (207SGS551: N) or the set value specified in 207SGS553. If it is determined that the determined used set value stored in the above is the same (207SGS553: Y), the special figure display result determination table according to the current gaming state, the start port buffer value, and the set value is selected. And set (207SGS556). After that, the same processing as the processing executed in the variable display result determination module in the 207SGS525 shown in FIG. 8-14 (A), that is, the processing of 207SGS571 to 207SGS557 shown in FIG. 8-16 is performed (207SGS557).

Subsequently, it is confirmed whether or not the 207SGS557 determines that the variable display is a big hit (207SGS558), and when it is determined that the variable display is not a big hit (207SGS558; N), whether or not the 207SGS557 determines that the variable display is a small hit. Is confirmed (207SGS559).

When the 207SGS558 determines that a big hit will occur in the variable display (207SGS558; Y), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 is set to the ON state (207SGS561). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIGS. 8-12 (A) and 8-12 (B) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (207SGS562). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer and "big hit A" to "big hit F" in the jackpot type determination table. It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be according to the determination ratio shown in the figure according to which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of the above is matched (207SGS563).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of the 207SGS563, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be changed to either a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which the player has a higher advantage than the time-saving state. Whether to control is decided before the definite special symbol as the variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 (207SGS564), the determined jackpot type can be set. Remember. As an example, the jackpot type may be set to "1" to "6" according to "big hit A" to "big hit F".

On the other hand, when the 207SGS559 determines that a small hit is obtained in the variable display (207SGS559; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGS560 and the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 is set to the ON state (207SGS560). ..

On the other hand, if the 207SGS559 does not determine that a small hit will occur in the variable display, that is, if the variable display does not result in a small hit (207SGS559; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS565.

In the 207SGS565, whether or not to control the big hit game state (whether or not the big hit flag is set) is determined in advance, and whether or not to control the small hit game state (whether or not the big hit flag is set). In addition, a definite special symbol is set according to the pre-determined result of the above, and further, the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state. As an example, a special symbol indicating the "-" symbol, which is an outlier symbol, is set as the finalized special symbol in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "out of place". Further, when the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" by 207SGS558, for example, when the big hit type in 207SGS563 is "big hit A", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is confirmed. Set to. When the jackpot type is "big hit B", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the finalized special symbol. In addition, when the special figure display result is determined to be "small hit" by 207SGS559 (when the small hit flag is set in 207SGS560), the special figure display result is set to "small hit" in advance. Corresponding to the determination result, the special symbol indicating the symbol "2" which is the small hit symbol is set as the finalized special symbol. It should be noted that these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the fixed special symbol is set in the 207SGS565, the set value specified in the 207SGS553 is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the determined used set value (207SGS566), and then the value of the special figure process flag is set to the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process. After updating to "1" (207SGS567), the special symbol normal processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in 207SGS545 (207SGS545; Y), after the predetermined demo display setting is made (207SGS568), the special symbol is normal. End the process. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed to the board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

Since the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment stores the determined used setting value as one of the game information in the RAM 102, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the first variable Although the mode in which the judgment used setting value does not exist when the display is executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the judgment used setting value is cleared by the RAM clear processing in the RAM 102. By storing in the area that is not set, even if the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, it is determined when the first variable display is executed. The used setting value and the setting stored in the start address of the RAM 102. The values (set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) may be compared.

In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 and 8-15, a mode in which the variable display result is determined by using the variable display result determination module that executes common processing is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result determination module is provided with a set value specified by the CPU 103 (a set value stored at the start address of the RAM 102) and a determined used set value. Control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the game stopped state when the process to be compared (207SGS551 to 207SGS553 shown in FIGS. 8-15) and the set value specified by the CPU 103 as the result of the process do not match the determined used set value. Processing (207SGS554 to 207SGS555) and the like may be included. By doing so, even when the random number value determination process at the time of winning is executed, the process of comparing the set value specified by the CPU 103 with the determined used set value and the set value specified by the CPU 103 and the determined use as the processing result are used. Since the process of controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the game stopped state can be executed when the set values do not match, the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be further improved.

Next, the process executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

FIG. 8-17 is a flowchart showing an example of a process (process in the pre-reading notice setting process) performed in the pre-reading notice setting process in step S161 of FIG. 7. In the process in the look-ahead advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 8-17, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a new start winning command has been received this time (step 048AKS001). If no new start winning command is received (step 048AKS001; No), the look-ahead notice is not executed, so the process in the look-ahead notice setting process is terminated.

When a new start winning command is received (step 048AKS001; Yes), it is determined whether the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is "1" (step 048AKS002), and the new start winning command is received. When the hold display number corresponding to the start winning command received in is "1" (step 048AKS002; Yes), the process in the look-ahead notice setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is not "1" (in the case of "2" to "4") (step 048AKS002; No), the execution prohibition condition of the look-ahead notice is satisfied. It is determined whether or not the command is performed (step 048AKS003). The execution prohibition condition is a condition for prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead notice, and here, the winning judgment result specification command included in the newly received start winning command specifies "no judgment". When, that is, when there is a judgment other than "non-reach" in the variable display executed before the target (the contents of the start winning command buffer are checked, and the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is displayed. When each winning judgment result specification command of the previous hold display number or the newly received start winning command is the first starting winning command, each winning command stored in the second starting winning command buffer This is a condition that is satisfied when there is a command that specifies a winning judgment result (judgment result equal to or higher than reach) other than "non-reach" in the judgment result specification command. The execution prohibition condition is also satisfied when it is already determined to execute the look-ahead chance eye in the variable display executed before the target (when the look-ahead chance eye flag described later is in the ON state). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by preventing the pre-reading chances for a plurality of targets from being executed. In addition to this, the look-ahead chance may be executed when the target is reach or higher. Note that executing the look-ahead chance eye means executing the look-ahead notice effect by displaying the look-ahead chance eye.

When the execution prohibition condition of the look-ahead notice is satisfied (step 048AKS003; Yes), the process in the look-ahead notice setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the execution prohibition condition of the look-ahead notice is not satisfied (step 048AKS003; No), it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead chance eye (step 048AKS004). Specifically, in step 048AKS004, whether or not to execute the look-ahead chance eye according to the winning determination result and the type of the look-ahead chance eye when executing are determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-18. In the feature unit 048AK, as shown in FIG. 8-18, any one of “no execution”, “look-ahead chance eye A”, and “look-ahead chance eye B” is determined by the determined determination ratio shown in the figure. The look-ahead chance eye is an effect executed as a look-ahead notice, and the variable display of the decorative symbol executed before the target (when a plurality of variable displays are executed, each of the plurality of variable displays) is variablely displayed. As a result, it is an effect of deriving and displaying a predetermined chance eye (a non-reach chance eye when the reach is not established in the variable display).

In the feature unit 048AK, two types of look-ahead chance eyes are prepared, one is "look-ahead chance eye A" and the other is "look-ahead chance eye B". The "look-ahead chance eye A" and the "look-ahead chance eye B" have different target jackpot expectations and different chance eyes to stop (as shown in FIG. 8-18, the look-ahead chance eye A has "234". The predetermined chance eye is stopped, and in the look-ahead chance eye B, the predetermined chance eye of "345" is stopped.). It should be noted that the decorative pattern may be made to emit light when the chance eye is stopped. In this case, the "look-ahead chance eye A" and the "look-ahead chance eye B" are distinguished from each other by using different emission colors. You may try to do it. As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, the jackpot expectation is higher when the "look-ahead chance eye B" is executed than when the "look-ahead chance eye A" is executed.

In addition to this, for example, the determination ratio of the display result derived and displayed as the look-ahead chance eye may be different depending on the set value. For example, in the case where the look-ahead chance eye is composed of a combination of odd decorative symbols such as 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9, the combination of "315" (Saikou) is a look-ahead chance only when the set value is "6". It may be derived and displayed as an eye. Further, for example, in the case of a low setting, a combination in which the middle symbol and the right symbol have the same number, such as "133", "155", and "377", is derived and displayed as a look-ahead chance eye. (In addition, since the middle symbol and the right symbol have the same number in the predetermined display described later, in that case, one of them is designated as the middle symbol so that the look-ahead chance eye and the predetermined display can be distinguished. Instead of the right symbol, the left symbol and the middle symbol may have the same number), and if the setting is high, the look-ahead chances are the same, such as "135", "357", and "379". It is also possible to increase the ratio of derivation and display of so-called combinations that do not include numbers. That is, the set value may be suggested by the type of the look-ahead chance eye that is derived and displayed (the look-ahead chance eye may include the setting suggestion effect).

After returning to FIG. 8-17 and executing the process of step 048AKS004, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the look-ahead chance eye (step 048AKS005). When the look-ahead chance eye is not executed (step 048AKS005; No), the process in the look-ahead notice setting process is terminated. When executing the look-ahead chance eye (step 048AKS005; Yes), after setting the look-ahead chance eye flag indicating that the look-ahead chance eye is executed to the on state (step 048AKS006), the process in the look-ahead notice setting process ends. .. The look-ahead chance eye flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

In addition, for example, a hold display notice effect is performed for the hold of the target of the look-ahead chance eye so that the player can visually recognize which is the target of the look-ahead chance eye, and the target of the look-ahead chance eye is. The display mode of the hold display may be changed to a mode different from the normal mode. That is, when the look-ahead chance eye is executed, the hold display notice effect may be executed at the same time. In addition, the hold display notice may be executed separately from the look-ahead chance eye.

FIG. 8-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed by the feature unit 048AK. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 8-19, the effect control CPU 120 first reads, for example, the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, so that the special figure display result is "missed". (Step S521). When it is determined that the special figure display result is "missing" (step S521; Yes), for example, the specified fluctuation pattern is read by reading the EXT data in the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. Determines whether or not is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" (step S522).

If it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; Yes), the look-ahead chance eye, the predetermined display, and the like are used as a combination of the final stop symbols that constitute the non-reach combination. Which of the displays other than the above is derived and displayed is determined by the non-reach loss stop symbol or the like determination process (step 048AKS010).

FIG. 8-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the non-reach loss stop symbol determination process executed in step 048AKS010 of FIG. 8-19. In the process of determining the non-reach loss stop symbol or the like shown in FIG. 8-20, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the look-ahead chance eye flag is set to the ON state (step 048AKS011). When the look-ahead chance eye flag is on (step 048AKS011; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 has a look-ahead chance eye of the type determined in step 048AKS004 of FIG. , And if it is the look-ahead chance B, the corresponding decorative symbol of “345”) is determined as the final stop symbol (step 048AKS012).

After executing the process of step 048AKS012, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the variation immediately before the variation targeted at the look-ahead chance (the variation immediately before the target) (step 048AKS013). If it is not the change immediately before the target, the non-reach loss stop symbol determination process is terminated. On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation immediately before the target (step 048AKS013; Yes), the look-ahead chance eye flag is cleared to the off state (step 048AKS014) so that the look-ahead chance eye is not derived and displayed in the target change. The process of determining the reach loss stop symbol, etc. is completed. Note that, for example, when the look-ahead chance eye is executed only when the target fluctuation is a fluctuation equal to or greater than the reach (when the look-ahead chance eye is not executed when the target fluctuation is a non-reach fluctuation), the target The look-ahead chance eye flag may be cleared to the off state at the end of the fluctuation of. In this way, the look-ahead chance eye is continuously displayed from the time when the look-ahead chance eye flag is set to the ON state to the change immediately before the change of the target. In addition, a plurality of fluctuations for displaying the look-ahead chance eyes are prepared in advance as a pattern (for example, when the target fluctuation is the fourth fluctuation and the target is changed three times, the first and third look-ahead chances are prepared. A pattern for displaying the eyes, a pattern for displaying the look-ahead chance eyes for the second and third times, etc.), and the look-ahead chance eyes may be displayed according to the pattern.

When the look-ahead chance eye flag is off in step 048AKS011 (step 048AKS011; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined display determination process (step 048AKS015). In the feature unit 048AK, as a predetermined display, a combination of some decorative symbols among the fixed decorative symbols of the non-reach combination is displayed at a different ratio according to the set set value, thereby giving suggestions regarding the set value. Perform setting suggestion effect. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-23, the setting suggestion effect is performed by displaying the definite decorative symbols of the non-reach combinations of types A to C at different ratios according to the set values. In addition, the feature unit 048AK performs the predetermined display in the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state.

FIG. 8-21 is a flowchart showing an example of a predetermined display determination process performed in step 048AKS015 of FIG. 8-20. In the predetermined display determination process shown in FIG. 8-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the probability variation control is in progress (step 048AKS041). Whether or not the probability change control is in progress may be determined, for example, by reading the EXT data in the game state designation command transmitted from the main board 11. When the probability change control is not in progress (step 048AKS041; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the predetermined display determination process. On the other hand, when the probability variation control is in progress (step 048AKS041; Yes), it is determined whether or not the previous flag is on (step 048AKS042). The previous flag is a flag indicating whether or not the predetermined display is displayed in the fluctuation immediately before the fluctuation (previous fluctuation) for which the predetermined display is displayed, and is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. It is provided.

When the previous flag is on, that is, when the predetermined display is displayed in the previous fluctuation (step 048AKS042; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 ends the predetermined display determination process. On the other hand, when the previous flag is off (step 048AKS042; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the predetermined display is displayed, that is, whether or not the setting suggestion effect for displaying the predetermined display is executed according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-22. It is determined (step 048AKS043), and the predetermined display determination process is terminated. As described above, in the feature unit 048AK, when the predetermined display is displayed in the previous fluctuation, the predetermined display is not displayed, thereby preventing the predetermined display from being continuously displayed. On the other hand, the look-ahead chance eye, which is an effect that suggests the big hit expectation, is displayed continuously with a plurality of fluctuations as described above. It makes it easier for the player to recognize whether it is a suggestive effect, and prevents the player from being confused with the look-ahead chance by displaying the predetermined display continuously. In this example, an example of determining whether or not the predetermined display was displayed in the previous fluctuation is shown. For example, the number of consecutive times is counted, and if the number of consecutive times is 2, the predetermined display can be displayed. If it is three times, it may be restricted not to display the predetermined display. Further, the number of times that the predetermined display is continuously displayed may be different depending on the set value. According to this, the variation of the production is increased and the game entertainment can be improved. Hereinafter, executing the setting suggestion effect by displaying the predetermined display is simply referred to as executing the predetermined display.

FIG. 8-25 is a diagram showing a determination ratio for determining whether or not to execute the predetermined display. As shown in the figure, in the feature unit 048AK, whether or not it is in a so-called consecutive villa state (whether or not the consecutive villa flag described later is on), that is, whether or not it is the first big hit. Depending on the situation, the ratio of determining that the predetermined display is executed is different. In the illustrated example, the determination ratio is set so that the predetermined display is not executed when the villa is in a row. According to this, it is possible to prevent the set value from being easily guessed by executing the predetermined display in the so-called consecutive villa state, and to attract the attention of the player after the end of the first big hit. It should be noted that the predetermined display may be executed at a small rate such as 2% even during the consecutive villas.

After returning to FIG. 8-20 and executing the process of step 048AKS015, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the predetermined display, that is, whether or not the predetermined display is present (step 048AKS016). When there is a predetermined display (step 048AKS016; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of the predetermined display to be executed according to the set value according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-23 (step 048AKS017).

FIG. 8-23 is a diagram showing a determination ratio for determining the type of predetermined display to be executed. As shown in the figure, in the feature unit 048AK, predetermined displays of types A to C are prepared in advance, a combination of "344" decorative symbols is derived and displayed in type A, and "399" decorative symbols are displayed in type B. The combination of the above is derived and displayed, and in the type C, the combination of the decorative symbols of "577" is derived and displayed. Then, it is suggested that the higher settings are made in the order of type A <type B <type C. In this example, an example suggesting which setting value is used is shown. For example, the setting value has been changed, the setting value is an odd number or an even number, and the minimum setting of "1" is set. If it is a suggestion about a set value, such as not being a value, the suggestion may be different. Further, there may be a predetermined display of a type that is displayed only when the set value is set to a high setting. The high setting may be the setting value of the upper half such as 4 to 6 out of 1 to 6, or the upper two such as 5 and 6. The setting value 6, which is the highest setting value, is referred to as the highest setting value.

After returning to FIG. 8-20 and executing the process of step 048AKS017, the effect control CPU 120 determines a predetermined display (combination of determined decorative symbols) of the type determined in step 048AKS017 as the final stop symbol (step). 048AKS018). Subsequently, the previous flag is set to the ON state (step 048AKS019), the count value provided according to the type of the predetermined display is added by 1 (step 048AKS020), and then the process of determining the non-reach loss stop symbol or the like is completed. The count value provided according to the type of the predetermined display is the count value provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the predetermined display of the types A to C is displayed during the probable change state (only when the state is not the continuous villa state). It is for counting the number of times displayed. In step 048AKS020, the count value corresponding to the predetermined display of the type determined as the final stop symbol is added by 1. The count value is referred to in the final variation effect setting process (see FIG. 8-24) described later, displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-25 (f), and then cleared.

When it is determined in step 048AKS016 of FIG. 8-20 that there is no predetermined display (step 048AKS016; No), the effect control CPU 120 is not a combination of the predetermined display and the decorative symbol that serves as a look-ahead chance (other than the predetermined display, etc.). The reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol (step 048AKS021). As an example, in the process of step 048AKS021, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a left-determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and a predetermined left-determined value stored in advance in a ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to the symbol determination table or the like, among the confirmed decorative symbols, the left confirmed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Next, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the right-determined symbol, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122, is extracted, and a predetermined right-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred to. The right fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right-fixed decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left-fixed decorative symbol by setting in the right-fixed symbol determination table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a medium-fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and a predetermined medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred to. Therefore, among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Even if the decorative symbols constituting the predetermined display and the look-ahead chance eye (predetermined display, etc.) are not selected from each confirmed symbol determination table so as not to be a combination of the predetermined display and the decorative symbol that becomes the look-ahead chance eye in advance. Alternatively, when the combination of decorative symbols is decided, if the combination of the decorative symbols matches the predetermined display or the like, the lottery may be performed again. Further, in the process of step 048AKS021, for example, in the case of not in the probabilistic state, the combination of the same decorative symbols as the predetermined display may be displayed at a lower rate than in the case of the special state, regardless of the set value. It may be there.

After executing the process of step 048AKS021, the effect control CPU 120 finishes the process of determining the non-reach loss stop symbol, etc. after clearing the flag to the off state last time (step 048AKS022). In this way, when the look-ahead chance eye is executed, the look-ahead chance eye is executed with priority over the predetermined display. The look-ahead chance is executed regardless of whether or not it is in the probabilistic state, whereas the predetermined display is being controlled to the probabilistic state and is executed only after the end of the first jackpot game state (that is,). It is not executed in the state of consecutive villas). Further, while the look-ahead chance eyes are continuously displayed with a plurality of fluctuations, the predetermined display is not continuously displayed. Therefore, it is possible to attract the attention of the player in the probabilistic state, make it easier for the player to recognize whether it is the look-ahead chance eye or the predetermined display, and improve the interest. Even when the look-ahead chance eye is displayed, the predetermined display may be prioritized in the case of the probability change state. In this case, if the final stop symbol after the predetermined display is displayed is set as the look-ahead chance, the player may be confused. Therefore, if the predetermined display is prioritized, the look-ahead chance is set for a predetermined period. Eye execution may be restricted. Specifically, the execution of the look-ahead chance eye may be restricted until the predetermined display is displayed five times. Further, the execution of the look-ahead chance eye may be restricted from the time when the predetermined display is displayed five times until the three times of fluctuations are completed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by displaying the look-ahead chance eyes continuously on the display of the predetermined display. In addition, the consecutive villa state is once controlled to the big hit game state, and then becomes the consecutive villa state by becoming a big hit again during the probability change state after the end (the consecutive villa flag is set to the on state). In addition, after the consecutive villa state is reached, the probabilistic change control is performed a predetermined number of times without becoming a big hit again, and the process ends (the consecutive villa flag is cleared to the off state).

Returning to FIG. 8-19, when it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; No), a combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S522; No). Step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left / right confirmed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and a predetermined left / right confirmed stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to the symbol determination table, the symbol numbers of the fixed decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 are the same. Determine the decorative pattern of. Further, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining a medium-fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 and referring to a predetermined medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. Of the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol, and the fixed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, an arbitrary value is used. By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol, the fixed decorative symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-fixed decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. ..

When it is determined in step S521 that the special figure display result is not "missing" (step S521; No), the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability" (big hit C or big hit F). There is), or it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "small hit" or a case other than these (step S525). When it is determined to be "sudden" or "small hit" (step S525; Yes), a definite decoration that becomes the final stop symbol corresponding to the case of "sudden" or "small hit" such as the opening chance eye. The combination of symbols is determined (step S527). As an example, in response to the case where any of the fluctuation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, it is confirmed that the final stop symbol constituting one of the plurality of types of open chance eyes is used. Determine the combination of decorative patterns. In this case, the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the chance eye, which is updated by the random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122, is extracted, and the predetermined chance eye determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred to. Therefore, the combination of the definite decorative symbols constituting any of the opening chance eyes may be determined.

After executing any of the processes of step 048AKS010, step S524, and step S527, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the final variation is in the probability variation state (step 048AKS031). In step 048AKS031, for example, when the probability variation control is performed in 100 fluctuations after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is controlled to the probability variation state and it is determined whether or not it is the 100th variation. In the case of final variation (step 048AKS031; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the final variation effect setting process (step 048AKS032).

FIG. 8-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the final variation effect setting process performed in step 048AKS032 of FIG. 8-19. The final variation effect setting process is a process performed when the probability variation state ends without becoming a big hit. In the final variation effect setting process, the frequency of the displayed predetermined display is set to be visually displayed to the player for each type, or the number of balls acquired during the consecutive villa is set to be visually displayed to the player. Will be In the final variation effect setting process shown in FIG. 8-24, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the consecutive villa flag is set to the ON state, that is, whether or not the consecutive villa is in the villa (step 048AKS051).

When the villa is not in the villa, that is, when the villa flag is off (step 048AKS051; No), the effect control CPU 120 is set to display the respective count values provided according to the predetermined display type (for each type). (Count value display setting of) is performed (step 048AKS052). In step 048AKS052, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (f), a setting is made to display the appearance frequencies of types A to C by a bar graph. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 clears each value of the count values provided according to the type of the predetermined display to 0, and if the previous flag is on, clears it to the off state, and sets the acquired ball output count value to 0. After clearing (step 048AKS053), the final variation effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step 048AKS051 that the villa is in the villa, that is, when the villa flag is on (step 048AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of balls acquired during the villa. (Step 048AKS054). In addition, the number of balls (acquired balls) acquired during the consecutive villas starts counting because it is controlled to the jackpot game state, and if the consecutive villas are not performed, it is cleared by the above step 048AKS053, and the consecutive villas are cleared. If so, it is cleared in step 048AKS056 described later. That is, it suffices that the balls that are acquired in the jackpot game state are continuously counted during the period from when the consecutive villa flag is turned on to when it is turned off.

After executing the process of step 048AKS054, the effect control CPU 120 clears the consecutive villa flag to the off state (step 048AKS055), and shifts to the process of step 048AKS053 described above.

Returning to FIG. 8-19, when it is determined in step S525 that the value is other than "probability" or "small hit" (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot D, and jackpot E) (step S525; No), A combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol constituting the jackpot combination is determined (step S526). As an example, in the process of step S527, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a jackpot confirmed symbol updated by a random counter of RAM 122 or the like is extracted, and then a predetermined jackpot confirmed symbol stored in advance in ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to the determination table or the like, the symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" on the screen of the image display device 5 are the same. Determine the decorative pattern. At this time, it may be determined that a different decorative symbol is set as the final decorative symbol depending on which of the jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot D, and jackpot E is the jackpot type.

After executing either the process of step S526 or the process of step 048AKS032, or when it is determined in step 048AKS031 that the final fluctuation is not in the probabilistic state (step 048AKS031; No), the effect control CPU 120 sets other effect execution settings. (Step S530). For example, an effect such that a predetermined sound effect (for example, an alarm sound, a chime sound, a siren sound, etc.) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a predetermined timing at the start or during execution of the variable display, or a game effect. Immediately announce (deterministically) that the variable display result will be a "big hit" by executing the effect of a predetermined mode including a part or all of the effect of the mode in which the flash lamp included in the lamp 9 or the like shines. The effect of the one-shot notification mode may be executed. Alternatively, as a notice effect during fluctuation, an effect of displaying a special effect image (premium image) corresponding to the variable display result being a "big hit" may be executed.

As another example, in the process of step S530, regardless of the possibility that the variable display result becomes a "big hit", for example, a setting for executing a predetermined mode of effect for liveliness may be made. More specifically, it suffices to be able to perform a predetermined mode of effect, such as an effect in which a predetermined lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 illuminates, or an effect of displaying a predetermined effect image as a mini character.

After that, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step S531). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 selects, for example, one of a plurality of prepared special figure variation effect control patterns in response to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, and sets the pattern to be used. After executing the process of step S531, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the RAM 122 is set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command (step S532). Subsequently, a setting is made to start the variation of the decorative pattern or the like in the image display device 5 (step S533). At this time, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the special figure fluctuation effect control pattern determined as the pattern to be used in step S532 is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S534), and then the variable display start setting process ends.

FIG. 8-25 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when a predetermined display or a count value display for each type is performed. In the illustrated example, a predetermined display of type A is executed, not in the consecutive villas. Further, it is a probabilistic change state, and the probabilistic change control is performed until the fluctuation is performed 100 times after the end of the big hit game state. Fluctuations are initiated as shown in FIG. 8-25 (a). It should be noted that FIG. 8-25 (a) is assumed to be the 99th change after the end of the big hit game state. When it is determined to execute the predetermined display in the fluctuation and the type is type A, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (b), the combination of the decorative symbols of "344" (determined in step 048AKS018 of FIG. 8-20). The combination of the decorative patterns) is derived and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (c), the 100th variation, that is, the final variation in the probability variation state is started, and as shown in FIG. 8-25 (c), the lost symbol (step 048AKS021 in FIG. 8-20). The combination of decorative patterns determined in the above) is derived and displayed. As a result, the probability change state ends. At the end of the probabilistic state, after the end of the final variation, a message indicating that effect (a message indicating the end of the ST mode, which is the probabilistic state) is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-25 (e). Then, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (f), the count value for each type set in the process of step 048AKS052 in FIG. 8-24 is displayed (graph is displayed for each type), which is a normal state. It will shift to the mode.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, in the display result determination table, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. Regardless of the above, the range from 1024 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. Then, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1), the set value is set according to each set value from 1238. The range up to the value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are set with the hit determination value 1020 as the jackpot reference value. Since it is set to be a continuous numerical range, when determining whether or not it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is from 1020 to a non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not it is within the numerical range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

In particular, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, since the numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to one place with 1020 as the reference value within the range of 0 to 65535, there are a plurality of numerical ranges of the advantageous state determination value. It is not necessary to execute the determination of whether or not the value of the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot determination value (whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state) multiple times as compared with the case where the random value is provided. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, in the display result determination table, the above-mentioned hit determination value is obtained regardless of whether the game state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variation state. Since 1020 is set as the jackpot reference value and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are set to be continuous numerical ranges, when determining whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled. Is whether or not the value of the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and from 1020 to the non-common numerical range according to the probability variation state. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not it is within the range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the jackpot game state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, in the display result determination table, the numerical value of the small hit determination value is determined according to whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The number of judgment values included in the range is different (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, whereas the number of judgment values included in the second special figure display result is different. The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the judgment table is 655, which is about twice.) On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value itself uses 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value). It is set. Therefore, when determining whether or not the small hit game state is controlled, the value of the random number MR1 is a numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not the number is within, the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state can be reduced.

As shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since it is set in a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value when the set value is 6, whether or not it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. When determining whether or not the random value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value, it is controlled to the small hit gaming state. When determining whether or not, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special chart. Therefore, the CPU 103 It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state.

Further, the RAM 102 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment can store the installation value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-15, the CPU 103 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment is stored in the RAM 102 every time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined). While reading the set value, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value corresponding to the read set value are set (the display result judgment table according to the set value is set), and the jackpot game state is set. It is determined whether or not to control. That is, the CPU 103 reads the set value from the RAM 102 each time the variable display is executed, and sets the display result determination table according to the read set value. It is possible to prevent the display result from being determined.

In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, the set value is read from the RAM 102 each time the variable display is executed, and the display result determination table is set according to the read set value. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 may read a set value from the RAM 102 and set a display result determination table according to the read set value. .. When setting the display result determination table according to the set value read from the RAM 102 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in this way, the setting is made during the period until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected. All variable display results may be judged using the display result judgment table.

Further, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the RAM 102 each time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined), and reads the read set value and the previous variable display result. A setting value read from the RAM 102 (judgment used setting value) is compared for judgment, and if the setting value read from the RAM 102 this time and the judgment used setting value do not match as the comparison result, an image is displayed. Since the error notification is executed by the image displayed on the display device 5, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate variable display result from being determined due to reading out an inappropriate set value. Further, it is possible not only to more accurately identify that an inappropriate set value is set in the RAM 102, but also to make the surroundings of the gaming machine recognize that the set value set in the RAM 102 is abnormal. Therefore, the clerk of the pachinko / pachislot machine can quickly deal with the abnormal set value.

In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, a mode in which the set value stored in the RAM 102 and the determined used set value are compared each time the variable display is executed has been illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. However, the set value stored in the RAM 102 and the determined used set value may be executed based on the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times or the elapse of a predetermined time.

Further, the CPU 103 compares the set value read from the RAM 102 with the previously used set value, and if the set value read from the RAM 102 this time does not match the determined used set value as the comparison result, the effect is produced. An error designation command is transmitted to the control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 displays the notification image 207SG005M4 on the image display device 5 based on the reception of the error designation command from the CPU 103. It is possible to more reliably prevent the determination of an inappropriate variable display result from being read out.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 to 8-16, the CPU 103 is variable by using a variable display result determination module that is common when executing the random number value determination at the time of winning and when executing the special symbol normal processing. Since the display result is determined, a part of the processing can be shared between when the random value determination at the time of winning is executed and when the special symbol normal processing is executed, and the processing load of the CPU 103 can be suppressed.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, if the fluctuation special figures are the same, a small hit is made regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the numerical range of the determination value is the same, the CPU 103 sets the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value read from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display (to the set value read from the RAM 102). Since the display result determination table is set according to the above), the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state can be reduced. Further, as in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, the RAM 102 When setting the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the set value read from, the process for setting the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value read from the RAM 102 is standardized. Therefore, the capacity of the processing program can also be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, when 1 (the set value having the lowest jackpot probability) is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values is set. Is not set, so if 1 is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1, it should be determined whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state by targeting only the common numerical range as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the jackpot gaming state.

In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, a mode in which the jackpot reference value is set to the lowest value in the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot reference value may be set to the maximum value in the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. That is, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to be continuous from the maximum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set to be continuous from the minimum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, a mode in which the small hit reference value is set to the lowest value in the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit reference value may be set to the maximum value in the common numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK, a combination of some decorative symbols among the fixed decorative symbols of the non-reach combination is displayed at a different ratio according to the set set value as a predetermined display while controlling to the probabilistic state. do. Further, in addition to the predetermined display, the look-ahead chance eye composed of the fixed decorative symbols of the non-reach combination is also displayed as the variable display result, so that the variation of the production can be increased and the game entertainment can be improved. Further, the look-ahead chance eye may also be displayed at a different ratio depending on the set value. According to this, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because it is suggested which set value is set by the variable display result during the control to the probabilistic state.

Further, the probability change state is caused by the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times (100 times) after the end of the big hit game state, or the jackpot game state before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. finish. That is, if the jackpot game state is not reached again, the probability change state continues until at least a predetermined number of special figure games are executed. Therefore, even when the state is controlled to the probability change state and the state is changed to the normal state without being controlled to the big hit game state again, it is possible to prevent the game from being deteriorated by displaying the predetermined display.

Further, the feature unit 048AK displays different types of predetermined displays at different ratios according to the set set values for the predetermined displays of types A to C. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to which type of predetermined display is displayed.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination constituting the look-ahead chance eye is a combination of symbols different from the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination constituting the predetermined display. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate between the look-ahead effect and the setting suggestion effect, and it is possible to prevent the effect from being confused with the notice effect of the jackpot expectation. Further, while the look-ahead chance eye can be continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, the predetermined display is restricted so as not to be continuously displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined display from being confused with the pre-reading notice exercise by being displayed continuously.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK, after being controlled to the probabilistic state, the count value provided according to the type of the predetermined display is displayed at the timing controlled to the normal state, so that the frequency of the predetermined display can be determined. Make it recognizable to others. According to this, the player can confirm the frequency at which the predetermined result is displayed, and it is possible to easily predict the set value. In addition, the count value displayed according to the type of the predetermined display is displayed when the consecutive villa flag is off, that is, at the timing when the normal state is reached without becoming a big hit again after being once controlled to the probability change state. Only done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the set value from being easily guessed by displaying the count value at the time of consecutive villas. On the other hand, in the case of a consecutive villa, instead of displaying the count value provided according to the type of the predetermined display, the number of balls acquired during the consecutive villa is displayed at the timing when the normal state is reached. .. According to this, the winning balls in the consecutive villas are displayed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(Modification example of feature part 048AK)
As shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, the feature unit 048AK sets the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) to the large hit determination value regardless of the game state and the set value. Although it is provided in a different range that is not continuous with the numerical range of, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification, as shown in FIGS. Regardless of the state or the set value, the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value may be continuously provided.

When the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) are continuously provided in this way, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is increased. By shifting the reference value of the small hit determination value accordingly, the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be changed while maintaining the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), when the set value is 1, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is 1024 to 1237. Is set to 1238 to 1565 (1238 is a reference value for the small hit determination value) so that the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. When the set value is 2, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1238 to 1253 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1254 to 1581 (1254 is a reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. When the set value is 3, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1238 to 1272 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1273 to 1600 (1273 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. After that, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set in the same manner.

When the game state is the probabilistic state, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (B), when the set value is 1, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346, and the small hit judgment is made. The common numerical range of values is shifted by the amount that the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value increases from the normal state or the time saving state, and 1347 to 1674 (1347 is the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. Set to (reference value). When the set value is 2, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1347 to 1383 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1384 to 1711 (1384 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. When the set value is 3, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1347 to 1429 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1430 to 1757 (1430 is a reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. After that, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set in the same manner.

Further, as a form in which the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) are set to be continuous in this way, as shown in FIG. 8-27, The numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set to the range of 65308 to 65535 (the range of the rear end of the numerical value that the hit judgment value can take), and the big hit judgment value is continuous with the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. A common numerical range (64990 to 65207) may be set. Further, in this case, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is set so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the minimum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is changed according to the set value. The jackpot probability may be different depending on the set value.

When setting the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value as shown in FIG. 8-27, when determining the variable display result, the CPU 103 first determines the value of the random number value MR1. Is equal to or greater than the minimum value of the jackpot determination value (in the example shown in FIG. 8-27, the setting value 1 is 64990, the setting value 2 is 64974, and the setting value 3 is 64954). When it is determined that the value of the numerical value MR1 is equal to or greater than the minimum value of the jackpot determination value, it is further variable by determining whether or not the random number value MR1 is equal to or greater than the reference value of the small hit determination value of 65208. It suffices to determine whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit. By determining the variable display in this way, the variable display result is determined without executing both the determination of whether or not the variable display result is a big hit and the determination of whether or not the variable display result is a small hit. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the determination of the variable display result of the CPU 103.

As described above, in FIGS. 8-26 and 8-27, the numerical range of the jackpot determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot determination value). Common numerical range of common numerical range and small hit judgment value, when 2 to 6 are set as set values for pachinko game machine 1, common numerical range of big hit judgment value, non-common numerical range and small hit judgment value The common numerical range) is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020, which is the reference value of the big hit judgment value, and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the big hit judgment regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is set to include the same number of judgment values in a continuous range from the numerical range of values. Therefore, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of 1020 and the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value, so that the large hit game state or the small hit game state It is possible to determine whether or not to control. Further, when it is determined that the control is performed in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the big hit game is determined by determining whether or not the random number value MR1 is equal to or greater than the minimum value in the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value. Since it is possible to determine whether to control the state or the small hit game state, the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls to the big hit game state and the determination whether to control to the small hit game state. It is possible to reduce the processing load of performing the above.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26, when the gaming state is controlled to the probabilistic state by the CPU 103, the jackpot determination value increases as a continuous numerical range from the jackpot reference value of 1020, and the increased jackpot determination value. Since the numerical range of the small hit determination value shifts according to the numerical range of, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state within the numerical range in which the number of the jackpot determination values has increased, and the small hit gaming state. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not to control, the processing load for determining whether or not to control the big hit game state by the CPU 103 and the processing load for determining whether or not to control the small hit game state are reduced. be able to.

Further, also in the modes shown in FIGS. 8-26 and 8-27, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set. Since the CPU 103 only needs to determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state only for the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values, the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls to the jackpot gaming state is reduced. can do.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 8-26 and 8-27, a mode in which the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set so as to be continuous with the maximum value of the numerical range of the large hit determination value is illustrated. The numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set so as to be continuous with the minimum value of the numerical range of the large hit determination value.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are continuously set is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the figure is shown in the figure. As shown in 8-28 and FIG. 8-29, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set to different numerical ranges.

When the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value are set to different numerical ranges in this way, as shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (the numerical range of the small hit judgment value ( The non-common numerical range (judgment included in the non-common numerical range) when the small hit judgment value (common numerical range) is different from the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the set value of the big hit judgment value is 6. In a numerical range different from the numerical range with the largest number of values), a continuous numerical range from the reference value of the small hit judgment value (32767 to 33094 in FIG. 8-28, 32767 to 33421 in FIG. 8-29, in any case. The reference value of the small hit determination value may be set to 32767).

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, the reference value of the small hit judgment value is common according to the fluctuation special figure, but the judgment value included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Although the forms in which the numbers are different are illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of judgment values included in the reference value of the small hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value regardless of the fluctuation special chart. May be the same as.

As described above, in the modes shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1020 to 1237 with 1020 as the reference value regardless of the set value. There is. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2 to 6, a numerical value different from the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value). In the range, the range corresponding to the set value with 60000 as the reference value (60,000 to 60016 for the set value 2, 60000 to 60035 for the set value 3 ... 60000 to 60109 for the set value 6) is a big hit. It is set as a non-common numerical range of judgment values. Therefore, in the development environment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot probability can be changed only by changing the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value according to the change of the set value. Therefore, the development of the pachinko gaming machine related to the set value. The load can be reduced. Further, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not to control the big hit game state and determining whether or not to control the small hit game state by the CPU 103.

In particular, since the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value to the jackpot gaming state with the same value of 60000 as the reference value regardless of the set value, the CPU 103 can determine the jackpot. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the game state.

Further, in the modes shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, as in the case of the feature portion 048AK described above, when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set. Is not set, the CPU 103 may determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state only for the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. Therefore, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.

Further, in the modes shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) is the common numerical range of the large hit determination value regardless of the set value. In a numerical range different from the non-common numerical range, 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) to be a continuous numerical range (32767 to 33094). That is, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value includes the same number of set values regardless of the set value, the CPU 103 has the same value regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control the small hit gaming state with 32767 as the small hit reference value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state of the CPU 103.

In the modes shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, while the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the pachinko game When 1 is set as the set value for the machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is not set, and when 2 or more is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1, it corresponds to each set value. Although the embodiment in which the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot determination value is not set. A common numerical range may be set. Even when 1 is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this way, when setting a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, for example, the reference is the same as in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29. The range from 1238, which is a value, to a value corresponding to each set value may be set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. Then, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the smallest, and the jackpot determination value increases as the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 increases. By expanding the non-common numerical range of, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state may be different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the modes shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. That is, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set as a continuous numerical range based on the same value although the number of determination values included is different according to the variation special map, the fluctuation special map is the first in the CPU 103. Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control the small hit game state using 32767, which is the same value in the case of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure, as a reference value, whether or not to control the small hit game state by the CPU 103 is performed. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to use it.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, the form in which the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set as the minimum value of the non-common numerical range is illustrated, but the present invention has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set as the maximum value of the non-common numerical range.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK of the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value or is not common. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state is determined based on whether or not the value is within the numerical range, and whether or not the value of the random number value MR1 is within the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. Although a mode for determining whether or not to control the small hit game state is illustrated based on the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is in the big hit game state by a method other than that shown in the feature unit 048AK. It may be determined whether or not to control the game and whether or not to control the small hit game state. For example, a calculation may be performed on the value of the random number value MR1 and it may be determined whether or not to control the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the value of the calculation result. Further, an operation is performed on the value of the random number value MR1, and a big hit game state or a small hit game is performed based on whether or not the value of the calculation result exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 65535 which is the maximum value of the hit determination value). It may be determined whether or not to control the state.

Further, in the above embodiment, the probability variation control is always performed after the end of the big hit game state, the special figure game of a predetermined number of times (100 times) is finished, or the next big hit game state is started. , An example of continuing until any one of the end conditions is satisfied first, but for example, the probability variation control may be continued until the next big hit game state is started (predetermined number of times (100 times). ) The end of the special figure game does not have to be the end condition of the probability variation control). In such a case, a jackpot type (non-probability change jackpot type) that is not controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state is prepared, and the predetermined special figure game ends after the end of the non-probability change jackpot game state. The associative state may end at the timing when the time saving control controlled up to is completed. In such a gaming machine, it may be possible to display a predetermined display even during control in a time saving state as well as in a probabilistic state.

Further, in such a gaming machine, although the probabilistic state continues until the next big hit game state is started, it may take a long time until the variable display result becomes a big hit (in the so-called consecutive villa). Hamari state). Therefore, for example, when the number of game balls that have won the variable winning ball device 6B exceeds a predetermined number, it is determined that the player has entered the hamari state in the consecutive villa, and the setting suggestion effect is performed according to the set value. May be good. Further, a launch sensor may be provided, and it may be determined that the player has entered the hamari state in the consecutive villa because the number of launches of the game balls exceeds a predetermined number, and the setting suggestion effect may be performed according to the set value. Furthermore, an out sensor is provided at the out port where the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in, and it is determined that the number of out balls exceeds a predetermined number and the player has entered the state of being in a row. , The setting suggestion effect may be performed according to the set value. According to this, it is possible to improve the game entertainment in the so-called villa state, and to promote the launch. In the setting suggestion effect, for example, the sound may be output, a specific character may be displayed, or both may be performed according to the set setting value.

Further, in the above embodiment, after the message indicating the end of the ST mode in the probabilistic state is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-25 (e), the predetermined display is displayed as it is as shown in FIG. 8-25 (f). An example is shown in which the count values provided according to the types of are displayed in a graph for each type, but this is an example. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (e), after a message indicating the end of the ST mode in the probabilistic state is displayed, the player is urged to operate the push button 31B (for example, a message such as pressing a button is displayed). , A button image, etc.), and based on the push sensor 35B detecting the movement of the player with respect to the push button 31B, the count value provided according to the predetermined display type may be displayed. good. According to this, it is possible to execute the production according to the preference of the player. When the movement by the player is not detected, it is not necessary to display the count value provided according to the type of the predetermined display.

(Explanation of feature part 063AK)
Next, the feature portion 063AK of the present embodiment will be described. In order to make the explanation easier to understand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 063AK, once a big hit is made, 100% probability variation control is performed after the end of the big hit game state. It shall be. That is, it is assumed that the big hit types of "big hit A" to "big hit F" shown in FIG. 8-12 are prepared as the big hit types as in the feature unit 063AK. In the pachinko gaming machine in the feature unit 063AK, only the time saving control is executed in either or both of the first special figure and the second special figure after the end of the big hit game state, and the state shifts to the low accuracy and high base state. A jackpot type of jackpot G (also referred to as non-probability variation jackpot) or a jackpot type of jackpot H whose probability variation control continues (that is, does not end depending on the number of times) until the next jackpot may be set. In addition, there may be a jackpot type in which neither high-accuracy control nor time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game is completed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 063AK of the present embodiment, a setting suggestion effect is performed in the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state. Then, in the setting suggestion effect performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 063AK, the execution mode of the mode 1 in which the ratio of selection is high when the setting value is set to be advantageous to the player and the execution mode of the player are high. There is an execution mode of the second aspect in which the ratio of selection is high when the setting value is set to an unfavorable value, and the execution mode of the first aspect has a longer execution period of the setting suggestion effect than the execution mode of the second aspect. It has the characteristic of being.

Such a feature is due to the following background. Generally, when an effect (advantageous effect) for notifying an advantage is executed, a player takes an image or a moving image of the effect with a mobile terminal owned by the player and shoots it on an SNS (Social). There is a tendency to post on websites that require membership registration such as Networking Services) and Internet video sharing sites. However, if the execution period of the advantageous effect is short, there arises a problem that an appropriate shooting time cannot be secured. On the other hand, with regard to the production (disadvantageous production) that is often performed in a disadvantageous case, there is no desire to shoot, so if the execution period of the disadvantageous production is long, the player will be uncomfortable. There is. Therefore, in the feature unit 063AK, the execution period for the advantageous effect is lengthened to secure the shooting time, and the execution period for the unfavorable effect is shorter than that for the advantageous effect to reduce discomfort. It has the characteristics of. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 063AK having such features will be described. It should be noted that the description of the same parts as those described in the above basic explanation and the feature portion 048AK will be omitted.

FIG. 9-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S177 of FIG. 7 as the ending effect process. In the ending effect processing shown in FIG. 9-1, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the ending effect in-progress flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS001). The ending effect in progress flag is a flag indicating that the ending effect is being executed, and is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. The ending effecting flag is set to the on state by the process of step 063AKS004 described later, and is cleared to the off state by the process of step 063AKS012.

When the ending effect in-progress flag is off (step 063AKS001; No), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (step 063AKS002). The ending command is, for example, a command transmitted from the main board 11 side in the process of step S117 of FIG. 5, and is a command indicating to start execution of the ending effect. If the ending command has not been received (step 063AKS002; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the ending effect process. The ending command includes an execution period of the ending effect. In the feature unit 063AK, as in the feature unit 048AK, the jackpot types of "big hit A" to "big hit F" shown in FIG. 8-12 are prepared, but the ending effect is executed regardless of the jackpot type. The period is common (eg 20 seconds).

On the other hand, when the ending command is received (step 063AKS002; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs an ending effect start setting process for starting the effect operation that is the ending effect (step 063AKS003). After that, after setting the ending effect in-progress flag to the on state (step 063AKS004), the ending effect process ends.

FIG. 9-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the ending effect start setting process executed in step 063AKS003 of FIG. 9-1. In the ending effect start setting process shown in FIG. 9-2, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-3 (step 063AKS021). The example shown in FIG. 9-3 shows an example in which whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed is determined by the determined determination ratio shown regardless of the set value, but the execution ratio differs depending on the set value. You may do so. Specifically, when the set value is a high setting of 4 to 6, the execution rate may be higher than when the set value is a low setting of 1 to 3. On the contrary, the execution rate may be higher in the low setting than in the case of the high setting.

Returning to FIG. 9-2, after executing the process of step 063AKS021, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect, that is, whether or not there is execution (step 063AKS022). When there is execution (step 063AKS022; Yes), the execution mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined according to the set value according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-4 (step 063AKS023). In the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment, there are two types of execution modes of "aspect 1" and "aspect 2" as execution modes of the setting suggestion effect, and as shown in FIG. 9-4, "aspect 1" is set. The higher the set value, the higher the rate of determination. On the other hand, in "Aspect 2", the lower the set value is set, the higher the rate of determination is. Here, the higher the set value is, the higher the probability that the variable display result will be a "big hit" (higher ball output rate). Therefore, when the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" is performed, , It is suggested that the ball output rate is set to a high set value (advantageous set value) (advantageous suggestion is made). The setting suggestion effects of "Aspect 1" and "Aspect 2" in the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment are both effects of displaying characters, but different characters are displayed in "Aspect 1" and "Aspect 2". Display (Aspect 1 is a character of character A, aspect 2 is a character of character B, etc.). The setting suggestion effect is not limited to the effect of displaying a character, and may be arbitrary as long as it is different between "aspect 1" and "aspect 2", such as an effect of displaying a message, a battle effect, and a dialogue effect. By determining the execution mode of the setting suggestion effect in step 063AKS023, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is also determined. In the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is longer in the case of executing the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" than in the case of executing the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 2". There is. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is advantageous is performed, and it is possible to secure the shooting time. In addition, since the shooting time can be secured, the shot images and videos will be published by the player on the Internet. In many cases, the images taken by which pachinko gaming machine 1 in which amusement park are also included. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the amusement park, the player will promote the amusement park. Therefore, by securing the shooting time when the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is advantageous is performed, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the player but also to the playground side.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-4, it is shown that there are two types of execution modes, but in addition to this, for example, when the set value is a low setting of 1 to 3, it is not executed and the set value is 4. There may be an execution mode of "Aspect 3" that is executed only when the high setting of ~ 6 is set. Further, there may be an execution mode of "Aspect 4" that is executed only when the set value of 6 is the highest set value. In this case, when the set value of 6 is set. It suffices that the determination rate of the "aspect 4" is lower than the rate at which the setting suggestion effect other than the "aspect 4" is executed. According to this, since the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 4" increases, the player is given a recognition that the set value is not 6 when the setting suggestion effect other than "Aspect 4" is executed. It is possible to prevent the game from being stolen, and it is possible to prevent the game from being enjoyed. Further, there may be a mode in which the setting value is an even number or a mode in which the setting value is an odd number.

Returning to FIG. 9-2, after executing the process of step 063AKS023, the effect control CPU 120 sets the preparatory effect for setting the execution of the preparatory effect (step 063AKS024). In the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the ending effect, a predetermined period (see FIG. 9-8) regardless of whether the execution mode is “aspect 1” or “aspect 2”. During the period of T1 shown), as a preparatory effect, an effect of urging the player to prepare for shooting is executed. In addition to urging the player to prepare the camera as a preparation for shooting, the preparatory effect is also an effect that suggests the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect to the player (see FIG. 9-9).

After executing the process of step 063AKS024 of FIG. 9-2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the mode determined in step 063AKS023 is "mode 1" (step 063AKS025). In the case of "Aspect 1" (step 063AKS063; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets a special effect for setting the execution of the special effect (step 063AKS026). In the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment, when the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" is executed, a special effect that is not executed by the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 2" is further executed. That is, the special effect is an effect performed during the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1". Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (D), the special effect in the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment displays an effect image around the character displayed as the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1". It is a production. Not limited to this, for example, a special sound may be output. In this case, the special sound to be output may be the same sound as the sound output when the jackpot game state is controlled. According to this, it is suggested that it is advantageous, and the player can easily grasp the advantage.

After executing the process of step 063AKS026 in FIG. 9-2, the effect control CPU 120 sets the extended operation display for setting the execution of the display effect operation display (step 063AKS027). In the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment, when the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" is executed, the operation by the player is performed, so that even after the end of the ending effect (after the end of the jackpot game state), the said It is possible to recognize that the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" has been performed (extended display is possible). Therefore, in step 063AKS027, a display prompting an operation for making it visible that the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" has been performed even after the end of the ending effect is displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (E), a display for prompting an operation (extension operation) for the push button 31B is set. When the extension operation is performed, the feature unit 063AK displays the character image displayed as the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" as the background image for a period until the variable display is performed 15 times (FIG. FIG. 9-9 (I)). According to this, it is possible to take a picture again for a player who could not take an image corresponding to the setting suggestion effect of the aspect 1 during the ending effect, and also for another player. It is possible to appeal that the setting suggestion effect of 1 has been executed.

After executing the process of step 063AKS027 in FIG. 9-2, when it is determined in step 063AKS025 that it is "aspect 2" (step 063AKS025; No), or when it is determined that it is not executed in step 063AKS022 (step 063AKS022: No), the effect control CPU 120 is set to perform the return prevention notification and the warning display (step 063AKS028). As the return prevention notification set in step 063AKS028, a prepaid card or the like as a game recording medium in which balance information or the like is recorded as information that can specify the magnitude of the game value of the game ball or the like that can be used for the game. There is a return prevention display as a display to prevent forgetting to remove the card. In the return prevention display, for example, an image indicating that the card has been ejected is displayed together with the characters "Please be careful not to forget to remove the card." It should be noted that, instead of a card, a coin or the like as a game recording medium in which balance information or the like is recorded as information that can specify the magnitude of the game value such as a game ball that can be used for the game is targeted. You may perform an alert. The prepaid card or the like as the recording medium for the game is for enabling the game to be executed by inserting the card or the like. Further, as a warning display, there is a immersive prevention display as a display for preventing the player from being too enthusiastic about the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the slot machine. In the immersive prevention display, for example, the characters "Pachinko is a play that you can enjoy moderately. Be careful of immersiveness." And the image that surrounds the characters are displayed. The immersive prevention display as such a warning display suppresses or warns the player from being absorbed in the game, and suppresses or warns the player from spending a large amount of money on the game. In addition, as a warning display, a warning display prohibiting games under the age of 18 such as "Games under the age of 18 are prohibited by law" and a fraudulent act such as "Fraud is a crime." A warning display, a warning display for suppressing fraudulent acts such as "Please be careful about fraud disguised as a strategy", etc. may be displayed by characters and images. The other warning displays may be other than those shown above. For example, when a movable accessory is provided on the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the movement of the movable accessory may be displayed. Therefore, care may be taken not to get injured.

In the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is longer in the case of executing the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" than in the case of executing the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 2". There is. In addition, the execution period of the ending effect is the same regardless of the jackpot type. Therefore, in step 063AKS028, the execution period of the return prevention notification and the warning display is longer when the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 2" is executed than when the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" is executed. (T3 <T6 in FIG. 9-8), and the start timing of the next mode notification, which will be described later, is set to the same timing.

After executing the process of step 063AKS028 in FIG. 9-2, the effect control CPU 120 sets the next mode notification to notify the game state after the end of the big hit as the next mode notification (step 063AKS029), and the ending effect. Start Ends the setting process. In the process of step 063AKS029, the period for performing the next mode notification is also set. In step 063AKS029, the period of T4 shown in FIG. 9-8 is set as the next mode notification period. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is not executed, the period of T7 may also be set as shown in FIG. 9-8 (C).

Returning to FIG. 9-1, when it is determined that the ending effect in-progress flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS001; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the ending effect time has elapsed (step). 063AKS005). When it is determined that the ending effect time has elapsed, that is, when the execution period of the ending effect has ended (step 063AKS005; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 clears the ending effect in progress flag to the off state (step 063AKS012). Then, as the probability variation fluctuation number, the number of variable displays controlled to the probability variation state after the end of the big hit game state is set (step 063AKS013). In step 063AKS013, for example, 100 is set. Note that the process of step 063AKS013 may not be executed, and a command corresponding to the number of probable fluctuations may be received from the main board 11 side. After executing the process of step 063AKS013, the effect control CPU 120 clears the effect process flag, initializes the value to "0" (step 063AKS014), and then ends the ending effect process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step 063AKS005 that the ending effect time has not elapsed (step 063AKS005; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect, that is, whether or not there is a setting suggestion effect. Determine (step 063AKS006). When there is a setting suggestion effect (step 063AKS006; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes the ending effect operation control process when there is a setting suggestion effect (step 063AKS007), and shifts to the process of step 063AKS008. On the other hand, when there is no setting suggestion effect (step 063AKS006; No), the process proceeds to step 063AKS008 without executing the process of step 063AKS007.

FIG. 9-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the ending effect operation control process with the setting suggestion effect performed in step 063AKS007 of FIG. 9-1. In the ending effect operation control process with the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 9-5, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is the preparatory effect period (step 063AKS031). The preparation effect period is set by the process of step 063AKS024 in FIG. 9-2. In the case of the preparatory effect period (step 063AKS031; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the preparatory effect operation control for executing the preparatory effect (step 063AKS032).

After executing the process of step 063AKS032, or when it is not the preparatory effect period (step 063AKS031; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the setting suggestion effect period (step 063AKS033). The setting suggestion effect period is set according to the mode in accordance with the execution mode determined in step 063AKS023 of FIG. 9-2. If it is not the setting suggestion effect period (step 063AKS033; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the ending effect operation control process when there is a setting suggestion effect as it is.

In the case of the setting suggestion effect period (step 063AKS033; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the setting suggestion effect operation control for executing the setting suggestion effect of the mode determined in step 063AKS023 of FIG. 9-2 (step). 063AKS034). It is determined whether or not the mode of the setting suggestion effect subsequently executed is "aspect 1" (step 063AKS035), and if it is "aspect 1" (step 063AKS035; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is a special effect period. Determine (step 063AKS036). The special effect period may be set in step 063AKS026 of FIG. 9-2. The special effect period in the feature unit 063AK in this embodiment is the same period as the execution period of the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1". Therefore, if the special effect period is in the same period as the setting suggestion effect period, the process of step 063AKS030 is unnecessary. On the other hand, the special effect period may be shorter than the execution period of the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1". In this case, it may be determined by the process of step 063AKS030 whether or not it is the special effect period.

If it is the special effect period (step 063AKS036; Yes), the special effect operation control for executing the special effect is performed (step 063AKS037). After executing the process of step 063AKS037, or when it is not the special effect period (step 063AKS036; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the extended operation display period (step 063AKS038). The extended operation display period is set in step 063AKS027 of FIG. 9-2. If it is the extended operation display period (step 063AKS038; Yes), the extended operation display control for performing the extended operation display is performed (step 063AKS038A). Then, it is determined whether or not the operation by the player is detected by the push sensor 35B (step 063AKS039), and if it is detected (step 063AKS039; Yes), the extension flag is set to the on state. After that (step 063AKS040), the ending effect operation control process is terminated when there is a setting suggestion effect. The extension flag is a flag indicating that the extension operation has been performed by the player, and is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

When it is determined in step 063AKS035 that the execution mode is "Aspect 2" (step 036AKS035; No), when it is determined in step 063AKS038 that it is not the extended operation display period (step 063AKS030; No), or in step 063AKS039. If no operation is detected (step 063AKS039; No), the ending effect operation control process with the setting suggestion effect ends.

Returning to FIG. 9-1, after executing the process of step 063AKS00, or when it is determined in step 063AKS006 that there is no setting suggestion effect (step 063AKS006; No), the effect control CPU 120 is in the return prevention notification and alert period. It is determined whether or not there is (step 063AKS008). The return prevention notification and alert period are set in step 063AKS028 of FIG. 9-2. In the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment, the return prevention notification and the warning are given regardless of whether the setting suggestion effect is performed or not performed in the ending effect. The same applies to the next mode notification.

When it is determined in step 063AKS008 of FIG. 9-1 that the return prevention notification and alert period is in effect (step 063AKS008; Yes), the return prevention notification and alerting control for executing the return prevention notification and alerting are performed (step 063AKS008; Yes). Step 063AKS009). After performing the process of step 063AKS009, or when it is determined in step 063AKS008 that it is not the return prevention notification and warning period (step 063AKS008; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the next mode notification period. (Step 063AKS010). The next mode notification period is set in step 063AKS029 shown in FIG. 9-2. In the case of the next mode notification period (step 063AKS010; Yes), the ending effect processing ends after the next mode notification control for performing the next mode notification is performed (step 063AKS011). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the next mode notification period (step 063AKS010; No), the ending effect processing is terminated as it is. In the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment, as described above, once a big hit is made, 100% probability variation control is performed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. For example, the probability variation jackpot is shown. Only when becomes, it is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state, and when it becomes a non-probable big hit, it is controlled to the time saving state instead of the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state. In the mode notification, the notification corresponding to each of the probability change and the time reduction may be performed.

FIG. 9-6 is a flowchart showing an example of processing in the variable display start setting process performed in the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. 7. In the process in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 9-6, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the extension flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS041). When the extension flag is on (step 063AKS041; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 uses the character displayed in the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" as a special background for 15 fluctuations as a background image (special background). 15 variable special background setting is performed (step 063AKS042). Specifically, in the process of step 063AKS042, the value of the special background counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is set to "1" (the initial value is "0"), and the special background is displayed in the variable display. conduct. As a result, the special background is displayed from the variable display.

After executing the process of step 063AKS042, the effect control CPU 120 clears the extension flag (step 063AKS043). Then, the remaining number of times display setting for displaying the remaining number of times of variable display in which the special background is displayed is set (step 063AKS044). Specifically, in the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment, the character displayed in the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" as a special background from the end of the jackpot game state to the end of the variable display 15 times. Is displayed as a background image. Therefore, in step 063AKS044, 15 scales are displayed, and the player can visually display that the special background is displayed until the remaining 15 variable displays are completed. It should be noted that the display may not be a scale display but may be a numerical countdown display. Further, in this example, the remaining number display is updated (reducing the scale) at the end timing of the variable display (the remaining number display is updated by the special figure hit waiting process described later), but the variable display is displayed. The remaining number display may be updated at the same time as the start, and in that case, the remaining number display may be updated by the process in the variable display start setting process.

After executing the process of step 063AKS044, the effect control CPU 120 sets the special background display flag indicating that the special background is being displayed to the ON state (step 063AKS045), and processes in the variable display start setting process. To finish. The special background display flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step 063AKS041 that the extension flag is in the off state (step 063AKS041; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special background display flag is set to the on state (step). 063AKS046). If the special background display in-progress flag is on (step 063AKS046; Yes), the value of the special background counter is added by 1 (step 063AKS047), and then the process in the variable display start setting process ends. On the other hand, if the special background display flag is off (step 063AKS046; No), the normal background display setting for displaying the normal background instead of the special background is set (step 063AKS048), and then the variable display is started. End the process in the setting process. After the normal background display setting is once performed, the processing in the variable display start setting processing may not be performed until the jackpot game state is controlled again.

FIG. 9-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing in the special figure hit waiting process performed in the special figure hit waiting process executed in step S173 of FIG. 7. In the process in the waiting process for hitting the special figure, a process of determining whether or not the variable display has been performed 15 times and a process of updating the remaining number of times display are mainly performed. In the process in the special figure hit waiting process shown in FIG. 9-6, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the special background display in-progress flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS051). When the special background display in-progress flag is in the off state (step 063AKS051; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process in the special figure hit wait process as it is.

On the other hand, when the special background display in-progress flag is on (step 063AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 updates the remaining number display (step 063AKS052). Specifically, in step 063AKS052, the remaining number of times display is updated by turning on the scale corresponding to the remaining number of times among the 15 scale displays and turning off the finished variable display. That is, if it is the first variable display after the end of the big hit, the control is performed to turn off the 15th scale display (the remaining 14 scales are turned on). After executing the process of step 063AKS052, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the special background counter is 15, that is, whether or not it is the final variable display for displaying the special background (step 063AKS053). .. If the value of the special background counter is not 15 (step 063AKS053; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process in the special figure hit wait process.

When the value of the special background counter is 15 (step 063AKS053; Yes), it is assumed that the final variable display for displaying the special background is completed, the special background display flag is cleared (step 063AKS054), and the value of the special background counter is set. Is cleared to 0 (step 063AKS055), and then the special figure hit waiting process is terminated. As a result, No is determined in step 063AKS046 of FIG. 9-6, and the normal background is displayed in step 063AKS048.

FIG. 9-8 is a time chart showing an execution period of the ending effect and the like. Specifically, FIG. 9-8 (A) is a time chart when the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 is executed in the ending effect, and FIG. 9-8 (B) is a time chart of aspect 2 in the ending effect. 9-8 (C) is a time chart when the setting suggestion effect is executed, and FIG. 9-8 (C) is a time chart when the setting suggestion effect is not executed in the ending effect.

As described above, the execution period of the ending effect is the same regardless of the jackpot type. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-8, the execution period of the ending effect is a common period regardless of whether the setting suggestion effect is executed or not.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-8, the jackpot symbol is stopped and the round game is performed regardless of whether the setting suggestion effect is executed or not. Then, when the ending effect is started, when the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed and the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect is executed, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 (A) and 9-8 (B). In addition to urging the player to prepare the camera as a preparation for shooting, a preparatory effect that suggests the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect to the player is executed during the period of T1. On the other hand, when the setting suggestion effect is not executed, the next mode notification is executed for the period of T7 as shown in FIG. 9-8 (C).

Subsequently, when the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed and when the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect is executed, the setting suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 9-8 (A) and 9-8 (B). Run. In the case of the first aspect, the period setting suggestion effect of T2 is executed, and the special effect is also executed accordingly. In addition, the extension operation display is performed during the period within the period of T2 in which the setting suggestion effect is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 9-8 (A), an extension operation display is performed from a predetermined period after the setting suggestion effect is executed to the timing at the end of the setting suggestion effect, but within the period of T2. If there is, it may be any period.

Further, in the case of the second aspect, the period setting suggestion effect of T5 is executed. Specifically, the character of aspect 2 is displayed. In the feature unit 063AK, T2> T5. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-8, the end timing of the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect shown in FIG. 9-8 (B) coincides with the end timing of the next mode notification shown in FIG. 9-8 (C). An example is shown, but these timings do not have to match.

Subsequently, when the setting suggestion effect is completed, when the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (A), the return prevention notification and the warning display are performed during the period of T3, and the setting suggestion effect is displayed in the second aspect. When the setting suggestion effect of is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (B), the return prevention notification and the warning display are performed during the period of T6. In the feature unit 063AK, T6> T3. As shown in the figure, in the feature unit 063AK, T2 + T3 = T5 + T6, that is, the difference (T2-T5) between the execution period of the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 and the execution period of the setting suggestion effect of aspect 2 is aspect 2. Each period matches the difference (T6-T3) between the period of the return prevention notification, etc. when the setting suggestion effect of is executed and the period of the return prevention notification, etc. when the setting suggestion effect of mode 1 is executed. It is set. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is not executed, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (C), the return prevention notification and the warning display are executed for the same period as when the setting suggestion effect of aspect 2 is executed. do. If the setting suggestion effect is not executed, after the next mode notification is executed for the period of T7, the same notification (display) is performed for the same period as when the setting suggestion effect of aspect 2 is executed.

After the return prevention notification and the warning display are performed, in either case, the next mode notification is performed for the period of T4, and the ending effect is ended. After the end of the ending effect, that is, after the end of the big hit game state, the probability change state is controlled. However, if the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed, the extension operation is performed, and the extension flag is on, FIG. As shown in -8 (A), the special background is displayed for 15 fluctuations. In the example shown in FIG. 9-8, the relationship between the execution periods is T4 <T3 <T1 <T6 <T5 <T2 <T7, but the relationship is not limited to this, and T4 <T3 = T1 <T6. The relationship may be <T5 <T2 <T7, and as long as the relationship T1 <T5 <T2 is established, the other periods may be arbitrary. That is, in this example, the difference between T2 and T5 is adjusted by T3 and T6, but T4 may be included in the adjustment, and the period of T4 is adjusted instead of T3 and T6 in aspects 1 and 2. The difference between T2 and T5 may be adjusted depending on the difference between.

FIG. 9-9 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when an ending effect or the like is executed. Specifically, an example of an effect operation when the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed in the ending effect is shown. Further, in the illustrated example, an extension operation is performed and a special background is displayed after the end of the jackpot game state. First, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), when the jackpot symbol is stopped, a round game is subsequently performed. Then, when the ending effect is started, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B), a camera image is displayed so as to urge the player to prepare for shooting as a preparatory effect, and when is the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect? , 9-9 (B) and 9-9 (C) show the countdown. In addition, this preparatory effect suggests to the player that the character should be paid attention to by displaying a message such as "Attention to the character after ○ seconds" instead of simply displaying the countdown. It is also a production. That is, the preparatory effect is also an effect that includes an explanation of the content of the setting suggestion effect. In the illustrated example, only the message "Attention to the character" is given, but the content of the setting suggestion effect may be explained in more detail, for example, "whether the character A appears or not".

Then, when the preparatory effect is completed, the setting suggestion effect is executed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (D). Since it is the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect, a special effect of displaying an effect that makes the surroundings of the displayed character A stand out is also executed. Further, as shown in the figure, in the feature unit 063AK, when the setting suggestion effect of the aspect 1 is executed, the display time of the character of the character A corresponding to the aspect 1 is visually displayed to the player. In the illustrated example, the display period is visible on the meter display, but a countdown display may be used. The control of the display time of the character may be executed in step 063AKS034 when the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 is executed, or when the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 is executed in step 063AKS007. In addition, a process for controlling the display period may be added separately.

Subsequently, in the extended operation display period, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (E), the image of the push button 31B is displayed as the extended operation display. The feature unit 063AK displays the extension operation in such a manner that it can be recognized that the extension is performed by performing the operation. Therefore, it is easy for the player to understand what happens when the operation is performed, and the game interest can be improved.

Then, when the player's operation on the push button 31B is detected, the display is extended as shown in FIG. 9-9 (F) as the extension flag is turned on, that is, special after the end of the jackpot game state. Visibly display that the background is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 9-9 (F), another example of displaying a message such as "Special time has entered!", That is, an example of performing the next mode notification is shown, but this is an example, and the next time. Mode notification does not have to be performed. The next mode notification may be executed in other periods in addition to the execution period of T4 shown in FIG. 9-8, and may be executed, for example, within the execution period of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 9-9 (F) shows an example in that case. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-9 (F), unlike FIGS. 9-9 (D) and 9-9 (E), the character of character A is in a pose with a V sign. , The pose may be the same as in FIG. 9-9 (D) and FIG. 9-9 (E). For example, as shown in the figure, when the pose of the character changes with the passage of time, the pose character at the timing when the push button 31B is operated may be displayed as a special background after the jackpot game state ends. In the example shown in FIG. 9-9, the push button 31B is operated in the manner shown in FIG. 9-9 (F), and the character image of the pose is displayed as a special background. Apart from this, even if the pose of the character changes with the passage of time, the character image of the pose displayed at the start of the setting suggestion effect may be displayed as a special background regardless of the operation timing.

During the return prevention notification and warning display period, as shown in Fig. 9-9 (G), the return prevention notification includes the message "Please be careful not to forget to remove the card." To prevent forgetting to remove the card. Is displayed, and the message "Pachinko is a play that you can enjoy moderately! Be careful of your immersiveness." Is displayed as a warning display. Then, when the next mode notification period is reached, the message "Special time has entered!" Is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (H), and then the ending effect ends, so that the jackpot game state ends. In addition to the next mode notification, for example, the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be displayed. Further, in the illustrated example, a character image of the character A displayed as the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is displayed in accordance with the return prevention notification and the warning display. When the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect is executed, the character image of the character B may be displayed together, and when the setting suggestion effect is not executed, the character image may not be displayed. In addition, unlike this, a common character image may be displayed in accordance with the return prevention notification and the warning display regardless of whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed.

After the jackpot game state ends, it is controlled to the probability change state. Then, since the extension operation is performed by the player, the special background is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (I) until the variable display of 15 times is completed. Although the effect image as a special effect is not displayed and only the character image is displayed, the effect image may also be displayed. Further, in the feature unit 063AK, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (I), 15 memory displays are performed as the remaining number display, and the memory display is turned off one by one each time the variable display ends. ing. In the illustrated example, an example of a state in which the third variable display is performed after the end of the big hit game state is shown.

In addition, in the feature unit 063AK in this embodiment, when the operation is performed by the player, the special background is displayed in the variable display of a predetermined time (15 times) after the end of the big hit game state, and corresponds to the mode 1. Although an example of extending the character display to be performed is shown, the special background may be displayed in the variable display of a predetermined time (15 times) regardless of the operation of the player. According to this, the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed, that is, the display suggesting that the ball output rate is set to a high set value (advantageous set value) is displayed for a long period of time. It is possible to appeal to the player of the pachinko machine 1 and give a sense of superiority to the player of the pachinko machine 1. In addition to this, when the operation is performed by the player, the special background may be displayed (+15 times) in the variable display 30 times instead of the variable display 15 times. Further, for example, the later the operation timing by the player, the greater the number of variable displays in which the special background is displayed. The number of times may be different. This can attract the player's interest in displaying the special background for a longer period of time. Further, for example, when the operation is performed according to a plurality of specific timings existing during the extended operation display period, the variable display number of times the special background is displayed may be increased. Further, for example, among a plurality of specific timings, +10 times when the operation is performed at the first specific timing, and +10 times when the operation is performed at the second specific timing, etc., depending on the number of operations according to the plurality of specific timings. The variable number of times the special background is displayed may be increased. Further, the variable display number of times that the special background is displayed may be reduced (for example, -1 time) by an operation other than the specific timing. According to this, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to operate at a specific timing.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 063AK of the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect of the aspect 1 having a high ratio determined when the setting value is high and the setting value are set to a low setting value. Of the setting suggestion effect of aspect 2 having a high ratio determined in the case, as shown in FIG. 9-8, the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 is executed for a longer period than the setting suggestion effect of aspect 2 (from T5). But T2 is longer). According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the setting suggestion effect of the aspect 1 suggesting that the setting value is advantageous is performed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, the setting suggestion effect is executed in the ending effect, and different characters are displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the setting suggestion effect of the aspect 1 suggesting that the setting value is advantageous is performed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

As shown in FIG. 9-8, the execution period of the ending effect in the feature unit 063AK is a common execution period regardless of whether the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 is executed or the setting suggestion effect of aspect 2 is executed. Is. According to this, it is not necessary to change the execution period of the ending effect depending on the mode of the setting suggestion effect, and the control load on the main board 11 side can be reduced.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (B), by extending the period of the return prevention notification and the warning display, the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed and the setting of the second aspect is performed. The difference in the execution period when the suggestion effect is executed is adjusted. By extending the execution period of the return prevention notification, it is possible to prevent forgetting to take the prepaid card or the like as a recording medium for games. In addition, as a warning display, the period of the immersive prevention display is extended, so that the immersiveness in the game can be reduced.

In the feature unit 063AK, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the lapse of a specific period, which is the execution period of the preparation effect, after the ending effect is started. Since the setting suggestion effect is executed after the period as the preparatory effect elapses, it is possible to make it easier to pay attention to the mode of the setting suggestion effect rather than executing the setting suggestion effect at the start of the ending effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-8, the period of the preparatory effect in the feature unit 063AK is shorter than the execution period of the setting suggestion effect (T1 <T5 <T2). Therefore, after the lapse of a specific period, which is the execution period of the preparatory effect, the setting suggestion effect for a period longer than the specific period is executed. According to this, it is possible to easily grasp the setting suggestion effect.

In addition, the feature unit 063AK performs an extension operation display, and when an operation is performed by the player within the extension operation display period, a special background is used in the 15 variable displays executed after the end of the jackpot game state. The image of the character corresponding to the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is displayed. According to this, it can be grasped that the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed even after the end of the big hit game state.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, when the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed, the special effect is also executed. The special effect is an effect of displaying an effect image around the character corresponding to the first aspect, and is an effect that is not executed when the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect. Further, as a special effect, the feature unit 063AK may output a special sound which is the same sound as the sound output when the jackpot game state is controlled. It can be easily grasped.

(Modification example of feature part 063AK)
In the feature unit 063AK of the above-described embodiment, the modes 1 and 2 are prepared as the mode of the setting suggestion effect, and the mode 1 is determined in a high ratio when it is set to an advantageous setting value. Although a certain example has been shown, for example, the setting suggestion effect of the aspect 1 may be a setting suggestion effect of an aspect in which it is confirmed that the setting value is set to an advantageous value. The advantageous set value means a set value having a high ball ejection rate as described above, and a set value in which the base value obtained by multiplying the number of so-called safe balls by the number of launch balls by 100 is 100 or more. (For example, set value 4 or more). According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect in which the advantageous setting value is determined, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK of the above embodiment, an example of displaying the image of the push button 31B as the extension operation display is shown (see FIG. 9-9 (E)), but in addition to this, the operation by the player is effective. The operation validity period that can be accepted by the player may be displayed so that the player can see it. In this case, the operation validity period may be, for example, a meter display or a countdown display. Further, in the feature unit 063AK of the above-described embodiment, an example in which the return prevention notification and the warning display are simultaneously performed is shown, but the return prevention notification and the warning display are alternately and repeatedly displayed, or T4 in FIG. 9-8. Of the period, the first half may be a return prevention notification and the second half may be a warning display.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK of the above-described embodiment, the period of the return prevention notification and the warning display is different depending on whether the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is performed or the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect is performed. An example of adjusting the execution period of the ending effect itself (T3 and T6 in FIG. 9-8) is shown, but in addition to this, the adjustment is made including the period of the next mode notification (T4 in FIG. 9-8). You may try to do it. Of the period of the return prevention notification and the warning display, one of them may be T6 and the other period may be T3.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK of the above embodiment, the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed by displaying the special background (extending display) in the 15 times variable display performed after the end of the big hit game state. An example has been shown in which the player can visually recognize the fact and the player who could not take an image corresponding to the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect during the ending effect can take a picture again. Is an example. If the player can recognize that the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect has been performed after the end of the jackpot game state (capable of shooting as an image or a moving image), the extended display aspect is not limited to the special background, for example. , The hold display is set to the aspect of the character of the aspect 1, a special notice effect corresponding to the setting suggestion effect of the aspect 1 is executed, and the decorative pattern is different from the normal time, and the character of the aspect 1 is executed. May be added. Further, it may be possible to select which of these modes is used depending on the operation timing of the player. According to this, since the extended display can be performed in the mode desired by the player, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, regardless of the operation timing of the player, it may be possible to select in which mode the extended display is to be performed, or it may be determined by lottery. Further, even when the operation is performed by the player, it may be possible to select again whether or not to perform the extended display by, for example, operating the cross key or the stick controller 31A.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK of the above-described embodiment, an example in which the setting suggestion effect of the first and second aspects is executed during the ending effect is shown, but this is an example. If the execution period of the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is longer than that of the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect, the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is arbitrary, and may be, for example, during a specific round game. It may be during variable display such as during reach production. If it is executed during the round game, it may be set in step S176 of FIG. 7, and if it is executed during the variable display, it may be set in the process of step S171 of FIG. 7 and executed in the process of step S172. ..

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portion 048AK and the feature portion 063AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the respective configurations relating to the other feature portions. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions. For example, when the setting suggestion effect in the feature unit 063AK is not performed in the ending effect, the setting suggestion effect by the stop symbol in the feature unit 048AK may be executed. Further, for example, when the setting suggestion effect of the aspect 1 in the feature unit 063AK is executed in the ending effect, the setting suggestion effect in the feature unit 048AK may be further executed. In this case, it is different from FIG. 8-23. The setting suggestion effect in the feature unit 048AK may be executed with reference to the table. That is, it is set to a high setting so as not to suggest that it is set to an unfavorable setting value even though it is suggested to be set to an advantageous setting value in the first aspect. The setting suggestion effect in the feature unit 048AK may be executed with reference to the table in which the determination ratio is set for the mode suggesting that the condition is present. According to this, it is suggested that both the setting suggestion effect in the feature unit 063AK and the setting suggestion effect in the feature unit 048AK are set to advantageous setting values, which gives the player a sense of expectation. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(Explanation of feature 077AK)
Hereinafter, the feature unit 077AK according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 10-1 (a) shows a configuration example of screen display in the image display device 5 with respect to the feature unit 077AK.

As shown in FIG. 10-1 (a), an active display area AHA, a first hold display area AHB1, and a second hold display area AHB2 are provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the active display area AHA, the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed. In the first hold display area AHB1, a hold display corresponding to a variable display (variable display in which execution is held) that has not yet been executed is displayed according to the number of first hold storages. In the second hold display area AHB2, the hold display corresponding to the variable display that has not been executed yet is displayed according to the second hold storage number. Hereinafter, the hold display displayed in the first hold display area AHB1 is referred to as "first hold display", and the hold display displayed in the second hold display area AHB2 is referred to as "second hold display".

In the first hold display area AHB1, the first hold display is displayed right-justified. In the first hold display area AHB1, four display parts are provided corresponding to "4" which is the upper limit of the first hold storage number, and hold numbers "1", "2", and "3" are provided in order from the right end. , "4", respectively.

When the number of 1st hold storage corresponding to the 1st special figure game increases based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start winning opening, the 1st hold display is displayed in the 1st hold display area AHB1. If not, a new first hold display is displayed as a hold display corresponding to the increase in the first hold storage number at the rightmost display portion associated with the hold number "1" in the first hold display area AHB1. to add. On the other hand, when the number of 1st hold storage corresponding to the 1st special figure game increases based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start winning opening, the 1st hold display is displayed in the 1st hold display area AHB1. When it is displayed, the display part (hold number "2" to "" is located on the left side of the display part where the first hold display is already displayed in the first hold display area AHB1 and the first hold display is not yet displayed. A new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to an increase in the number of first hold storages (display of a new first hold display) at the display part associated with any of 4 ”. Start).

When one or more first hold displays are displayed in the first hold display area AHB1 and a new first special figure game is started, the hold number "1" is set in the first hold display area AHB1. The first hold display is erased (digested) at the associated rightmost display portion. At this time, if the first hold display is displayed in the display portion associated with the other hold numbers "2" to "4", the direction of the display portion in which the first hold display is deleted is deleted. Move (shift) to the right side.

In the second hold display area AHB2, the second hold display is displayed left-justified. In the second hold display area AHB2, four display parts are provided corresponding to the upper limit of the second hold storage number "4", and the hold numbers "1", "2", and "3" are provided in order from the left end. , "4", respectively.

When the number of 2nd hold storage corresponding to the 2nd special figure game increases based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start winning opening, the 2nd hold display is displayed in the 2nd hold display area AHB2. If not, a new second hold display is displayed as a hold display corresponding to the increase in the second hold storage number at the leftmost display portion associated with the hold number "1" in the second hold display area AHB2. to add. On the other hand, when the number of 2nd hold storage corresponding to the 2nd special figure game increases based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start winning opening, the 2nd hold display is displayed in the 2nd hold display area AHB2. If it is displayed, the display part (hold number "2" to "" is located on the right side of the display part where the second hold display is already displayed in the second hold display area AHB2 and the second hold display is not yet displayed. A new second hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increase in the second hold storage number (display of a new second hold display) at the display part associated with any of 4 ”. Start).

When one or more second hold displays are displayed in the second hold display area AHB2 and a new second special figure game is started, the hold number "1" is set in the second hold display area AHB2. The second hold display is erased (digested) at the associated leftmost display portion. At this time, if the second hold display is displayed in the display portion associated with the other hold numbers "2" to "4", the direction of the display portion in which the second hold display is deleted is deleted. Move (shift) to the left side.

In the active display area AHA, in response to the start of the first special figure game, the display of the active display corresponding to the first hold display erased in the first hold display area AHB1 is started. Further, in the active display area AHA, in response to the start of the second special figure game, the display of the active display corresponding to the second hold display erased in the second hold display area AHB2 is started.

The display mode of the hold display is inherited as the display mode of the active display displayed in response to the deletion of the hold display. Specifically, when the display mode of the hold display is changed by the hold change effect described later, the display mode after the change is the display mode of the active display displayed in response to the deletion of the hold display. Will be taken over as. The hold display and the active display may have the same color and pattern, and for example, the active display may be displayed larger than the hold display.

In this embodiment, the special figure game is executed according to the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening (so-called winning order digestion).

The hold display is displayed in any one of a plurality of types of display modes. FIG. 10-1 (b) shows a setting example of the display mode of the hold display with respect to the feature unit 077AK. In the present embodiment, the hold display is displayed in any of the five display modes of the first mode to the fifth mode shown in FIG. 10-1 (b). Hereinafter, when the hold display is displayed in one display mode, the hold display is referred to as a hold display in the one display mode. For example, when the hold display is displayed in the second aspect, the hold display is referred to as the hold display in the second aspect.

The hold display of the first aspect as the first display aspect is a white round plain effect image. The hold display of the second aspect as the second display aspect is an effect image including a defense character image AK1 representing a defense character and a blue round plain effect image. That is, the hold display of the second aspect includes the defense character image AK1 as an additional image. The hold display of the third aspect is a green round plain effect image. The hold display of the fourth aspect is a red round plain effect image. The hold display of the fifth aspect is a golden round plain effect image.

Depending on which of the plurality of types of display modes the hold display is displayed, the degree of expectation that the jackpot game state as an advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display corresponding to the hold display differs (different ratio). It is controlled to the jackpot game state). That is, the hold display as the suggestion display is displayed corresponding to the variable display that has not been executed yet, and the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display is suggested by the display mode of the hold display. ing. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display mode of the hold display and improve the game interest. Hereinafter, the expectation degree controlled by the jackpot gaming state is referred to as a jackpot expectation degree (big hit reliability), and the expectation degree controlled by the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display corresponding to the hold display is the jackpot expectation degree of the hold display. It is called.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation of the hold display of the fifth aspect is higher than the jackpot expectation of the hold display of the fourth aspect, and the jackpot expectation of the hold display of the fourth aspect is the first. The jackpot expectation of the hold display of the third aspect is higher than the jackpot expectation of the hold display of the third aspect, the jackpot expectation of the hold display of the third aspect is higher than the jackpot expectation of the hold display of the second aspect, and the jackpot expectation of the hold display of the second aspect is the second. It is substantially the same as the jackpot expectation of the hold display in one aspect.

In the feature unit 077AK, as a look-ahead notice effect, the display mode of the hold display (hold display of the notice target) is changed to a display mode different from the first mode as the normal mode (the hold display is the first mode as the normal mode). Is displayed in a different display mode) It is configured to be able to execute the pending change effect.

In the present embodiment, when the hold change effect is executed, the display of the hold display to be announced is started in any of the display modes 1 to 5 at the timing when the start winning is generated, and then the hold display to be announced is started. , The display mode of the hold display can be changed each time the hold display shifts and the timing for starting the variable display arrives, and the hold display is the final display mode (the last hold display during execution of the hold change effect). It is displayed in any of the second to fifth aspects as the display aspect at the time of shift). Then, at the timing when the variable display immediately before the variable display corresponding to the hold display of the notice target ends and the variable display corresponding to the hold display of the notice target starts, the hold display of the notice target is deleted (digested). And the pending change production ends. That is, the hold change effect starts from the start of displaying the hold display of the notice target based on the occurrence of the start prize until the end of the variable display immediately before the variable display corresponding to the hold display of the notice target (notice). It is continuously executed (until the variable display corresponding to the target hold display is started).

As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the hold display is not necessarily displayed at the change timing of the hold display during the execution of the hold change effect (in the present embodiment, the timing at which the hold display shifts and the variable display is started). The mode does not always change, and the display mode of the hold display may be maintained (the display mode of the hold display does not change).

In the feature unit 077AK, the hold change effect is executed, and the suggestion effect suggesting the possibility that the display mode of the hold display to be announced may change can be executed. In the present embodiment, after the hold change effect is started, the suggestion effect can be executed each time the hold display shift timing as the change timing of the hold display arrives. In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect is not executed at the timing when the display of the hold display to be notified is started based on the occurrence of the start winning prize.

As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the suggestion effect can be executed even when the display mode of the hold display does not change at the timing when the hold display shifts after the hold change effect is started. Has been done. Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold display can be changed even when the suggestion effect is not executed at the timing when the hold display shifts after the hold change effect is started. There is.

FIG. 10-1 (c) shows a setting example of a type of suggestive effect and an effect mode with respect to the feature portion 077AK.

As shown in FIG. 10-1 (c), in the present embodiment, as the suggestion effect, the hold change effect is executed and the genuine suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display changes, and the hold change effect are executed. It is configured to be feasible with a Gase suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display does not change.

The authentic suggestion effect as the first suggestion effect is executed in any one of a victory mode and a lightning strike mode. Specifically, when the hold display is displayed in the second mode, the authenticity suggestion effect targeting the hold display is executed in any one of the victory mode and the lightning strike mode. .. On the other hand, when the hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the second mode, the authenticity suggestion effect targeting the hold display is executed in the lightning strike mode, not in the victory mode. That is, when the hold display is displayed in the second mode, the hold display is displayed at a higher rate than when the hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the second mode including the first mode. It is configured so that the target authenticity suggestion effect can be executed in a winning mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display mode of the hold display and improve the game interest. Hereinafter, when the authenticity suggestion effect is executed in the winning mode, the authenticity suggestion effect is referred to as "authenticity suggestion effect (winning mode)". Further, hereinafter, when the authenticity suggestion effect is executed in the lightning strike mode, the genuine suggestion effect is referred to as "authenticity suggestion effect (lightning strike mode)".

In the "authenticity suggestion effect (victory mode)", after the attack character appears, the attack character that appears and the defense character represented by the defense character image AK1 included in the hold display of the target second mode fight. Is performed, and the attacking character wins the defense character. That is, the "authenticity suggestion effect (victory mode)" is executed in a mode that acts on the defense character image AK1 included in the hold display of the target second mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. The "authenticity suggestion effect (lightning strike mode)" is an effect in which lightning strikes the target hold display after the attacking character appears.

Although the details will be described later, when the authenticity suggestion effect is executed in the winning mode, the jackpot expectation is different from that when the authenticity suggestion effect is executed in the lightning strike mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the mode of the authenticity suggestion production and improve the game interest.

The Gase suggestion effect as the second suggestion effect is executed in one of the defeat mode as the first effect mode and the retreat mode as the second effect mode. Specifically, when the hold display is displayed in the second mode, the Gase suggestion effect targeting the hold display is executed in any of the defeat mode and the retreat mode. .. On the other hand, when the hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the second mode, the Gase suggestion effect targeting the hold display is executed in the retreat mode and not in the defeat mode. That is, when the hold display is displayed in the second mode, the hold display is displayed at a higher rate than when the hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the second mode including the first mode. It is configured so that the target Gase suggestion effect can be executed in a defeat mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display mode of the hold display and improve the game interest. Hereinafter, when the Gase suggestion effect is executed in the defeat mode, the Gase suggestion effect is referred to as "Gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)". Further, hereinafter, when the Gase suggestion effect is executed in the retreat mode, the Gase suggestion effect is referred to as a “Gase suggestion effect (retreat mode)”.

In the "Gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)", after the attack character appears, the attack character that appears and the defense character represented by the defense character image AK1 included in the hold display of the target second mode fight. Is performed, and the attacking character is defeated by the defense character. That is, the "gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)" is executed in a mode that acts on the defense character image AK1 included in the hold display of the target second mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. The "gase suggestion effect (retreat mode)" is an effect in which the appearing attack character retreats after the attack character appears.

Although the details will be described later, when the Gase suggestion effect is executed in the defeat mode, the jackpot expectation is different from that when the Gase suggestion effect is executed in the retreat mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the mode of the suggestion effect of the ghost and improve the interest of the game.

"Authentic suggestion effect (victory mode)", "Authentic suggestion effect (lightning strike mode)", "Gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)", and "Gase suggestion effect (retreat mode)" are all on hold. Is executed in a manner recognizable by the player. According to such a configuration, the player cannot recognize which hold display is the target of the suggestion effect, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Specifically, the "genuine suggestion effect (victory mode)" and the "gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)" are the defense character and the attack character represented by the defense character image AK1 included in the hold display of the target second mode. Is executed in a manner of fighting. With such a configuration, the player can recognize the hold display of the second aspect including the defense character image AK1 representing the defense character fighting with the attacking character as the target hold display. The "authenticity suggestion effect (lightning strike mode)" is executed in a mode in which lightning strikes the target hold display. With such a configuration, the player can recognize the hold display in which lightning has fallen as the target hold display. The "Gase suggestion effect (retreat mode)" is executed in a mode in which the appearing attack character retreats after approaching the target hold display. With such a configuration, the player can recognize the hold display approached by the attacking character as the target hold display.

FIG. 10-2 shows a timing chart related to the suggestion effect with respect to the feature unit 077AK.

As shown in FIG. 10-2, in the "authenticity suggestion effect (victory mode)", after the appearance effect in which the attack character appears is executed, the attack character that appears and the defense character represented by the defense character image AK1 are displayed. A battle production is performed to perform a battle. In the appearance effect, the effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in the preset first size, and in the battle effect, the effect image is displayed in the preset second size larger than the first size. It is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In FIGS. 10-2 and 10-10 to 10-12, which will be described later, displaying the effect image in the first size is described as "effect image size: small", and the effect image is the first. Displaying in two sizes is described as "directed image size: large". In the appearance effect, the sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the preset first volume, and in the battle effect, the sound effect is louder than the first volume and the speaker 8L is set at the preset second volume. , 8R is output. In FIGS. 10-2 and 10-10 to 10-12, which will be described later, the output of the sound effect at the first volume is referred to as "volume: low", and the sound effect is the second volume. The output in is described as "volume: loud". In the "authenticity suggestion effect (victory mode)", after the battle effect is executed, the victory effect in which the attacking character defeats the defense character is executed. In the winning effect, the effect image is displayed in the second size, and the sound effect is output in the second volume.

In the "authenticity suggestion effect (lightning strike mode)", after the appearance effect is executed, a lightning strike effect in which lightning strikes the target hold display is executed. In the lightning strike effect, the effect image is displayed in the second size, and the sound effect is output at the second volume.

In the "Gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)", the appearance effect is executed, and after the battle effect is executed, the defeat effect in which the attacking character is defeated by the defense character represented by the defense character image AK1 is executed. In the defeat effect, the effect image is displayed in the second size, and the sound effect is output in the second volume.

In the "Gase suggestion effect (retreat mode)", after the appearance effect is executed, the retreat effect in which the appearing attack character retreats is executed. In the retreat effect, the effect image is displayed in the above-mentioned first size, and the sound effect is output at the above-mentioned first volume.

In the feature unit 077AK, when the Gase suggestion effect is executed in the defeat mode, the Gase suggestion effect can be executed in a mode that is easier for the player to recognize than when the Gase suggestion effect is executed in the retreat mode. It is configured. According to such a configuration, when the Gase suggestion effect is executed in the defeat mode, the player can compare that the Gase suggestion effect is executed in the retreat mode. It can be made easier to recognize. Specifically, as described above, in the "gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)", the effect image is displayed in the second size larger than the first size, and the sound effect is set to the second volume larger than the first volume. While the battle effect and defeat effect are executed, the effect image is displayed in the first size and the sound effect is output in the first volume in the "Gase suggestion effect (retreat mode)". Is executed. With such a configuration, the "Gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)" is more easily recognized by the player than the "Gase suggestion effect (retreat mode)".

As described above, it appears in any of the "genuine suggestion effect (victory mode)", "genuine suggestion effect (lightning strike mode)", "gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)", and "gase suggestion effect (retreat mode)". The production is executed. The appearance effect is executed in one of a mode in which one attacking character appears, a mode in which two attacking characters appear, and a mode in which three attacking characters appear. Although the details will be described later, either the authentic suggestion effect or the Gase suggestion effect is executed depending on which effect mode the appearance effect is executed (depending on the number of attacking characters appearing in the appearance effect). The ratio of being done is different.

That is, in the feature unit 077AK, when the Gase suggestion effect is executed in the defeated mode, the Gase suggestion effect can be executed in a manner partially common to the genuine suggestion effect as the first suggestion effect. There are a plurality of types of common modes, and the ratio of which of the genuine suggestion effect and the Gase suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of the common mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the types of common modes and improve the game interest.

As shown in FIG. 10-2, the production time of the “genuine suggestion effect (winning mode)” is longer than the production time of the “genuine suggestion effect (lightning strike mode)”. In addition, the production time of the "Gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)" is longer than the production time of the "Gase suggestion effect (retreat mode)".

FIG. 10-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of the effect control process process as the pre-reading advance notice setting process for the feature unit 077AK.

When the read-ahead notice setting process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 10-3 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a new start opening winning command for notifying the occurrence of the starting winning is received (step). 077AKS101). Hereinafter, the processing of step 077AKS101 will be described in detail.

In the present embodiment, based on the start winning (a game ball wins in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening), a command at the time of starting opening winning is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Is sent. Specifically, based on the fact that the game ball has won (entered) the first start winning opening, the first starting opening winning designation command and the first reserved storage number notification command are sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. , The winning judgment result command and the total pending memory count notification command are transmitted as the start opening winning command. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has won (entered) the second start winning opening, the second starting opening winning designation command, the second reserved memory number notification command, and the winning have been made from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The time judgment result command and the total number of pending memory notification commands are transmitted as the start opening winning command.

In the first start opening winning designation command, a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, and a starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. Based on the above, it is an effect control command indicating that the first start condition for executing the special figure game (first special figure game) using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. .. In the second start opening winning designation command, the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, and the starting winning (second starting winning) is given. Based on the occurrence, it is an effect control command indicating that the second start condition for executing the special figure game (second special figure game) using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. be. The first hold storage number notification command is an effect control command indicating the first hold storage number. The second hold storage number notification command is an effect control command indicating the second hold storage number. The winning determination result command is an effect control command indicating the result of the look-ahead determination performed by the CPU 103 included in the main board 11 in the starting winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process. In the present embodiment, in the start prize determination process, a random number value is extracted by the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of the start prize, and a variable display display result based on the start prize is displayed based on the extracted random number value. A look-ahead judgment for determining whether or not a "big hit" is made is performed by the CPU 103, and as a winning judgment result command indicating the result of the look-ahead judgment, when the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit", it is judged by the look-ahead judgment. One of the effect control command indicating that the effect has been determined and the effect control command indicating that the variable display display result is determined by the look-ahead determination to be other than "big hit" from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Will be sent. The total hold storage number notification command is an effect control command indicating the total hold storage number.

In the present embodiment, in the command analysis process executed in step S75 of the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the start port winning command has been received, and issues the start port winning command. If it is determined that the command has been received, the received start opening winning command is stored in the RAM 122.

FIG. 10-4 shows a configuration example of the storage area of the RAM 122 with respect to the feature unit 077AK.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, the storage area of the RAM 122 includes a first start opening winning command storage unit 077AK1 for storing a start opening winning command received when the first starting winning is generated, and a second starting opening winning command storage unit 077AK1. A second start port winning command storage unit 077AK2 for storing a start opening winning command received when a winning occurs, and a hold display change mode storage unit 077AK3 to be described later are provided. Although not shown, the storage area of the RAM 122 is provided with various flags whose state can be updated according to an effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11, including a flag for executing the hold change effect described later. Various effects used to control the effect operation, such as the effect control counter setting unit provided with various counters used to control the progress of the effect operation, including the effect control flag setting unit and the hold change count counter described later. An area for holding (storing) data is provided.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the start opening winning command has been received, and has received the first starting opening winning designation command and the first reserved storage number notification command as the starting opening winning commands. When it is determined (when it is determined that the start opening winning command is received when the first starting winning is generated), the received starting opening winning command (first starting opening winning designation command, first reserved storage number notification command) , Winning determination result command, total pending storage number notification command) is stored in the first starting port winning command storage unit 077AK1. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 determines in the command analysis process that the start opening winning command has been received, and also receives the second starting opening winning designation command and the second reserved storage number notification command as the starting opening winning command. If it is determined that the command has been received (when it is determined that the start opening winning command has been received when the second starting opening winning has occurred), the received starting opening winning command (second starting opening winning designation command, second reserved memory number). The notification command, the winning determination result command, and the total number of pending storage notification commands) are stored in the second start opening winning command storage unit 077AK2.

The command storage unit 077AK1 at the time of winning the first start opening is provided with four storage areas corresponding to the upper limit value "4" of the first hold storage number, and the hold numbers "1" and "" are provided in order from the beginning. It is associated with "2", "3", and "4". Each storage area is the first start opening prize designation command, the first hold storage number notification command, the winning judgment result command, and the total hold storage number notification command received as the start opening winning command when the first start winning is generated. Is configured to be memorable in association with the hold number. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 stores the start port winning command received when the first start winning is generated in the storage area provided in the first starting opening winning command storage unit 077AK1. Store in the storage area (first free space) associated with the smallest hold number among the storage areas (free space) that have not been set. In FIG. 10-4, the free area is indicated by "-". With such a configuration, in the first start opening winning command storage unit 077AK1, the starting opening winning commands received when the first starting winning is generated are stored in the storage area in order from the beginning according to the receiving order.

The command storage unit 077AK2 at the time of winning the second start opening is provided with four storage areas corresponding to the upper limit of the number of second hold storages, "4", and the hold numbers "1" and "" are provided in order from the beginning. It is associated with "2", "3", and "4". Each storage area is a second start opening prize designation command, a second hold storage number notification command, a winning judgment result command, and a total hold storage number notification command received as a start opening winning command when a second start winning is generated. Is configured to be memorable in association with the hold number. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 stores the start port winning command received when the second start winning is generated in the storage area provided in the second starting opening winning command storage unit 077AK2. Store in the storage area (first free space) associated with the smallest hold number among the storage areas (free space) that have not been set. With such a configuration, in the second start opening winning command storage unit 077AK2, the starting opening winning commands received when the second starting winning is generated are stored in the storage area in order from the beginning according to the receiving order.

Returning to FIG. 10-3, in step 077AKS101, the effect control CPU 120 has a new start opening winning command in either the first starting opening winning command storage unit 077AK1 or the second starting opening winning command storage unit 077AK2. By determining whether or not it is stored in, it is determined whether or not a new start opening winning command has been received.

When it is determined that the start opening winning command has not been newly received (step 077AKS101; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the pre-reading notice setting process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the start opening winning command is newly received (step 077AKS101; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hold change effect executing flag is on (step 077AKS102). The hold change effect executing flag is provided in, for example, the above-mentioned effect control flag setting unit, and is set to the on state based on the determination that the hold change effect is to be executed (step 077AKS108), and the hold change effect is set. It is cleared and turned off based on the end. With such a configuration, the effect control CPU 120 can determine whether or not the hold change effect is being executed by determining whether or not the hold change effect execution flag is on.

When it is determined that the hold change effect executing flag is not on (step 077AKS102; No), the effect control CPU 120 is used as the latest start port winning command (start opening winning command corresponding to the hold display to be notified). Based on the result of the look-ahead determination indicated by the received winning determination result command, it is determined whether or not the hold change effect is executed (step 077AKS103). Specifically, in step 077AKS103, the effect control CPU 120 performs a random number lottery using the hold change effect determination table shown in FIG. 10-5, thereby receiving a winning determination result command as the latest start opening winning command. However, the effect control command indicating that the variable display display result is "big hit" is judged by the look-ahead judgment, and the variable display display result is other than "big hit", it is judged by the look-ahead judgment. Whether or not to execute the hold change effect is determined according to which of the effect control command is used.

As shown in FIG. 10-5, when the winning judgment result command is an effect control command indicating that the pre-reading judgment is determined when the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", the winning judgment result command is , Executes the hold change effect at a higher rate than when the effect control command indicates that the read-ahead judgment determines that the display result of the variable display is other than "big hit" ("hold change effect"). Is decided. With such a configuration, when the hold change effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the hold change effect is not executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the hold change effect is executed, and to improve the game interest.

Returning to FIG. 10-3, after executing the process of step 077AKS103, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined in step 077AKS103 to execute the hold change effect (step 077AKS104).

In step 077AKS104, when it is determined in step 077AKS103 that the hold change effect is not executed (step 077AKS104; No), or in step 077AKS102, it is determined that the hold change effect execution flag is on (step 077AKS102). 077AKS102; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 increases the hold display of the first mode as the normal mode by one in the first hold display area AHB1 or the second hold display area AHB2 (step 077AKS105), and sets the read-ahead notice. End the process. Specifically, in step 077AKS105, the effect control CPU 120 is a start opening winning command corresponding to the hold display to be notified, and the latest received starting opening winning command is the first starting opening winning command storage unit 077AK1. If it is stored in, the hold display (first hold display) of the first aspect is incremented by one in the first hold display area AHB1, while the latest received start port winning command is the second start port. If it is stored in the command storage unit 077AK2 at the time of winning, the hold display (second hold display) of the first aspect is incremented by one in the second hold display area AHB2.

In the present embodiment, as described above, when it is determined that the pending change effect executing flag is on (step 077AKS102; Yes), the process does not proceed to step 077AKS103 for determining whether or not the pending change effect is executed. Has been done. With such a configuration, the hold change effect targeting the other hold display is not executed during the period during which the hold change effect targeting one hold display is being executed.

In step 077AKS104, when it is determined in step 077AKS103 that the hold change effect is executed (step 077AKS104; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is indicated by the winning determination result command received as the latest start opening winning command. Based on the result of the look-ahead determination, the final display mode of the hold display is determined (step 077AKS110). Specifically, in step 077AKS110, the effect control CPU 120 performs a random number lottery using the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 10-6, thereby receiving a winning determination result command as the latest starting opening winning command. However, the effect control command indicating that the variable display display result is "big hit" is judged by the look-ahead judgment, and the variable display display result is other than "big hit", it is judged by the look-ahead judgment. The final display mode of the hold display is determined according to which of the effect control command is used.

As shown in FIG. 10-6, when the winning determination result command is an effect control command indicating that the pre-reading determination determines that the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the second mode is held and displayed. The third aspect is determined as the final display mode of the hold display at a rate higher than the rate determined as the final display mode of the hold display, and the fourth aspect is determined at a rate higher than the rate of determining the third mode as the final display mode of the hold display. The final display mode of the hold display is determined, and the fifth mode is determined as the final display mode of the hold display at a rate higher than the ratio of determining the fourth mode as the final display mode of the hold display. On the other hand, when the winning judgment result command is an effect control command indicating that the pre-reading judgment determines that the display result of the variable display is other than "big hit", the second mode is determined as the final display mode of the hold display. The third aspect is determined as the final display mode of the hold display at a rate lower than the rate of determination, and the fourth aspect is the final display mode of the hold display at a rate lower than the rate of determining the third aspect as the final display mode of the hold display. The fifth aspect is determined as the final display mode of the hold display at a rate lower than the ratio of determining the fourth aspect as the final display mode of the hold display. With such a configuration, in the hold change effect, when the final display mode of the hold display is the third mode, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the final display mode of the hold display is the second mode, and the final display of the hold display is final. When the display mode is the fourth mode, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the final display mode of the hold display is the third mode, and when the final display mode of the hold display is the fifth mode, the final display mode of the hold display is Is higher in expectation of a big hit than in the fourth aspect.

As shown in FIG. 10-6, while the first aspect is not determined as the final display aspect of the hold display, the winning determination result command is determined by the look-ahead determination that the display result of the variable display is "big hit". When it is an effect control command indicating, the ratio of determining the second mode as the final display mode of the hold display is configured to be extremely low at 1%. With such a configuration, the jackpot expectation of the hold display in the first aspect is substantially the same as the jackpot expectation of the hold display in the second aspect.

After returning to FIG. 10-3 and executing the process of step 077AKS110, the effect control CPU 120 sets the current total number of pending storages to the number of processes (step 077AKS111). Specifically, in step 077AKS111, the effect control CPU 120 sets the total number of reserved storages indicated by the total number of reserved storages notification command received as the latest start opening winning command to the number of processes.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 updates by subtracting 1 from the number of processes (step 077AKS112), and determines whether or not the number of processes is "0" (step 077AKS113).

When it is determined that the number of processes is not "0" (step 077AKS113; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode before the change of the hold display according to the number of processes (step 077AKS114). Specifically, in step 077AKS114, the effect control CPU 120 performs a random number lottery using the hold display change mode determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 to obtain a display mode before the change of the hold display according to the number of processes. decide.

In the present embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the hold change effect (step 077AKS104; Yes), first, after determining the final display mode of the hold display (step 077AKS110), the process of step 077AKS114 is performed. By repeating the execution, the display mode before the change of the previous hold display is determined one by one in order from the final display mode.

As shown in FIG. 10-7, as the display mode before the change of the hold display, the same display mode as the display mode after the change of the hold display can be determined. When the same display mode as the display mode after the change of the hold display is determined as the display mode before the change of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 10-7, when the display mode after the change of the hold display is one display mode, the other display mode having a higher expectation of big hit than the one display mode is the change of the hold display. It is configured not to be determined as the previous display mode. For example, when the display mode after the change of the hold display is the display mode of the fourth mode, the display mode before the change of the hold display has a lower expectation of big hit than the fourth mode and the fourth mode. It is determined to be one of the first to third aspects, and is not determined to the fifth aspect, which has a higher expectation of big hit than the fourth aspect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the display mode of the hold display from changing to a display mode in which the expectation of a big hit is lower than that before the change (so-called “falling down”), and suppress the deterioration of the game interest. can.

In FIG. 10-7, the degree of expectation (change period attitude) in which the display mode of the hold display changes from one display mode to a display mode other than the one display mode is such that the display mode after the change of the hold display is the one. In the case of a display mode other than the display mode, the display mode before the change of the hold display is the total value of the ratio determined to the one mode. For example, the degree of expectation that the display mode of the hold display changes from the first mode to the display mode other than the first mode is the display mode before the change of the hold display when the display mode after the change of the hold display is the second mode. Is the ratio determined in the first aspect, and is the ratio in which the display mode before the change of the hold display is determined in the first aspect when the display mode after the change of the hold display is the third aspect. 3%, 15%, which is the ratio at which the display mode before the change of the hold display is determined as the first mode when the display mode after the change of the hold display is the fourth mode, and the display after the change of the hold display. When the aspect is the fifth aspect, the display mode before the change of the hold display is 20%, which is the ratio determined in the first aspect, and 40%, which is the total value. Similarly, the degree of expectation that the display mode of the hold display changes from the second mode to the display mode other than the second mode is the display before the change of the hold display when the display mode after the change of the hold display is the third mode. 65%, which is the ratio at which the aspect is determined as the second aspect, and 65%, which is the ratio at which the display mode before the change of the hold display is determined as the second aspect when the display mode after the change of the hold display is the fourth aspect. 70, which is the total value of 3%, which is the ratio at which the display mode before the change of the hold display is determined as the second mode when the display mode after the change of the hold display is the fifth mode. It becomes%.

That is, the degree of expectation that the display mode of the hold display changes from the second aspect to the display mode other than the second aspect is higher than the degree of expectation that the display mode of the hold display changes from the first aspect to the display mode other than the first aspect. Is expensive. In other words, the hold display of the second aspect has a higher attitude during the change period than the hold display of the first aspect. According to such a configuration, when the hold display of the second aspect is displayed, the game entertainment can be improved.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-7, the display mode after the change of the hold display is the fifth mode having the highest expectation of big hit or the second highest expectation of big hit among the first to fifth modes. In the case of the fourth aspect, the display mode before the change of the hold display is determined in the first aspect at a higher rate than the ratio in which the display mode before the change of the hold display is determined in the second aspect. That is, the display mode of the hold display of the first aspect changes to the fourth or fifth aspect at a higher rate than the rate at which the display mode of the hold display of the second aspect changes to the fourth or fifth aspect. do. According to such a configuration, when the hold display of the first aspect, which has a lower expectation of change than the hold display of the second aspect, is displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

After returning to FIG. 10-3 and executing the process of step 077AKS114, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode before the change of the hold display determined in step 077AKS114 is the same as the display mode after the change. Based on (whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes), whether or not the suggestion effect is executed and the type of the suggestion effect are determined (step 077AKS115). Specifically, in step 077AKS115, the effect control CPU 120 performs a random number lottery using the suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 10-8 to obtain a display mode before the change of the hold display determined in step 077AKS114. Based on whether or not the display mode is the same as the display mode after the change, whether or not the suggestion effect is executed and the type of the suggestion effect are determined according to the current number of processes.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, when the display mode before the change of the hold display determined in step 077AKS114 is not the same as the display mode after the change (when the display mode of the hold display changes), the suggestion effect is produced. Is configured so that it can be determined not to execute (“no suggestion effect”). With such a configuration, it is possible to change the display mode of the hold display when the suggestion effect is not executed at the timing when the hold display shifts, which is the change timing of the hold display. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give unexpectedness to the game and improve the interest of the game.

When the display mode before the change of the hold display determined in step 077AKS114 is the same as the display mode after the change (when the display mode of the hold display does not change (maintain)), it is determined to execute the suggestion effect. It is configured to be possible. With such a configuration, the suggestion effect can be executed when the display mode of the hold display does not change at the timing when the hold display shifts, which is the change timing of the hold display. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the present embodiment, when the display mode before the change of the hold display determined in step 077AKS114 is not the same as the display mode after the change, the display mode before the change of the hold display determined in step 077AKS114 changes. It is determined that the suggestion effect is not executed at a lower rate than in the case where it is the same as the later display mode. With such a configuration, when the suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display changes at a higher rate than when the suggestion effect is not executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is performed, and to improve the interest of the game.

If the display mode before the change of the hold display determined in step 077AKS114 is not the same as the display mode after the change, it can be determined to execute the genuine suggestion effect as the suggestion effect, while the Gase suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect. Then it is configured so that it is not decided. On the other hand, when the display mode before the change of the hold display determined in step 077AKS114 is the same as the display mode after the change, it can be determined to execute the Gase suggestion effect as the suggestion effect, while it is genuine as the suggestion effect. It is configured so that it is not decided to execute the suggestion effect. With such a configuration, the display mode of the hold display changes when the genuine suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect, and the display mode of the hold display does not change when the Gase suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect.

Returning to FIG. 10-3, after executing the process of step 077AKS115, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the suggestion effect is executed and determined in step 077AKS115 (step 077AKS116).

When it is determined in step 077AKS115 that the suggestion effect is executed (step 077AKS116; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the suggestion effect (step 077AKS117).

Specifically, in step 077AKS117, the effect control CPU 120 performs a random number lottery using the attack character number determination table shown in FIG. 10-9 (a) to select either a genuine suggestion effect or a false suggestion effect. When executed as a suggestion effect, the number of attacking characters appearing in the appearance effect executed in the suggestion effect is determined according to whether or not it is determined in step 077AKS115.

As shown in FIG. 10-9 (a), when it is determined in step 077AKS115 that the authentic suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect, the number of attacking characters appearing in the appearance effect is higher than the ratio of determining one person. The ratio is decided to be 2 people, and the ratio is decided to be 3 people at a higher ratio than the ratio to decide to 2 people. On the other hand, when it is determined in step 077AKS115 that the Gase suggestion effect is to be executed as the suggestion effect, the number of attacking characters appearing in the appearance effect is determined to be two at a rate lower than the rate of determining one. Decide on 3 people at a lower rate than the rate decided on. With such a configuration, when three attacking characters appear in the appearance effect executed in the suggestion effect, the ratio of the genuine suggestion effect being executed as the suggestion effect is higher than when two attack characters appear. High, and the ratio of Gase suggestion effects being executed as suggestion effects is low. In addition, when two attacking characters appear in the appearance effect executed in the suggestion effect, the ratio of the genuine suggestion effect being executed as the suggestion effect is higher than when one attack character appears, and the suggestion effect is performed. As a result, the rate at which the Gase suggestion effect is executed is low. That is, the ratio of which of the genuine suggestion effect and the Gase suggestion effect is executed according to which effect mode the appearance effect is executed (depending on the number of attacking characters appearing in the appearance effect). Is different.

When it is determined in step 077AKS115 that the authenticity suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 performs a random number lottery in step 077AKS117 using the authenticity suggestion effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 10-9 (b). As a result, whether or not the display mode before the change of the hold display is the second mode, and the effect that the winning judgment result command is judged by the look-ahead judgment when the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit". Depending on which of the control command and the effect control command indicating that it is determined by the look-ahead judgment that the display result of the variable display is other than "big hit", the effect mode of the authenticity suggestion effect is determined. The production mode is determined to be either a victory mode or a lightning strike mode.

As shown in FIG. 10-9 (b), when the display mode before the change of the hold display is the second mode, the winning judgment result command is determined by pre-reading when the display result of the variable display is "big hit". When it is an effect control command indicating that the determination has been made, the effect mode of the authenticity suggestion effect is determined to be the winning mode at a higher rate than the rate of determining the lightning strike mode, and the winning determination result command is the display result of the variable display. When is an effect control command indicating that is determined by the look-ahead determination to be other than "big hit", the effect mode of the authenticity suggestion effect is determined to be the lightning strike mode at a rate higher than the rate of determining the victory mode. With such a configuration, when the authenticity suggestion effect is executed in the winning mode, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the authenticity suggestion effect is executed in the lightning strike mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the mode of the authenticity suggestion production and improve the game interest.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (b), when the display mode before the change of the hold display is other than the second mode, the winning determination result command pre-reads when the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit". Regardless of whether or not the effect control command indicates that the determination has been made, the effect mode of the authenticity suggestion effect can be determined as the lightning strike mode, but the effect mode of the authenticity suggestion effect is not determined as the victory mode. It is configured as follows. With such a configuration, the "authenticity suggestion effect (winning mode)" is executed only when the target hold display is displayed in the second mode.

When it is determined in step 077AKS115 that the Gase suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 performs a random number lottery in step 077AKS117 using the Gase suggestion effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 10-9 (c). As a result, whether or not the display mode before the change of the hold display is the second mode, and the effect that the winning judgment result command is judged by the look-ahead judgment when the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit". Depending on which of the control command and the effect control command indicating that it is determined by the look-ahead judgment that the display result of the variable display is other than "big hit", the effect mode of the Gase suggestion effect is determined. It is decided which of the defeat mode and the retreat mode is used.

As shown in FIG. 10-9 (c), when the display mode before the change of the hold display is the second mode, the winning judgment result command is determined by pre-reading when the display result of the variable display is "big hit". When it is an effect control command indicating that the determination has been made, the effect mode of the Gase suggestion effect is determined to be the defeat mode at a higher rate than the rate of determining the retreat mode, and the winning judgment result command is the display result of the variable display. When is an effect control command indicating that is determined by the look-ahead determination to be other than "big hit", the effect mode of the Gase suggestion effect is determined to be the retreat mode at a higher rate than the rate of determining the defeat mode. With such a configuration, when the Gase suggestion effect is executed in the defeat mode, the big hit expectation is higher than when the Gase suggestion effect is executed in the retreat mode. That is, when the Gase suggestion effect is executed in the defeat mode, the jackpot expectation is different from that when the Gase suggestion effect is executed in the retreat mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the mode of the suggestion effect of the ghost and improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c), when the display mode before the change of the hold display is other than the second mode, the winning determination result command pre-reads when the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit". Regardless of whether or not it is an effect control command indicating that the judgment has been made, the effect mode of the Gase suggestion effect can be determined as the retreat mode, but the effect mode of the Gase suggestion effect is not determined as the defeat mode. It is configured as follows. With such a configuration, the "gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)" is executed only when the target hold display is displayed in the second mode, and the target hold display includes the first mode. It is not executed when it is displayed in a display mode other than the two modes. That is, when the hold display is displayed in the second mode, when the suggestion effect targeting the hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the second mode including the first mode. It is carried out in a defeated manner at a higher rate.

Returning to FIG. 10-3, after executing the process of step 077AKS117, or when it is determined in step 077AKS115 that the suggestion effect is not executed in step 077AKS116 (step 077AKS116; No), the process proceeds to step 077AKS112. ..

In the present embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the hold change effect (step 077AKS104; Yes), first, after determining the final display mode of the hold display (step 077AKS110), steps 077AKS114 to 077AKS117 By repeatedly executing the above processes, each display mode before and after the change of the hold display according to the number of processes, whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, the type of the suggestion effect, and the effect mode of the suggestion effect are determined.

When it is determined in step 077AKS113 that the number of processes is "0" (step 077AKS113; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines each display mode and suggestive effect before and after the change of the hold display determined in steps 077AKS114 to 077AKS117. Data indicating whether or not the above is executed, the type of the suggestion effect, and the effect mode of the suggestion effect are stored (stored) in the above-mentioned hold display change mode storage unit 077AK3 (step 077AKS106).

As shown in FIG. 10-4, the hold display change mode storage unit 077AK3 has eight storage areas (storage areas 1 to 8) corresponding to "8", which is the upper limit of the total number of hold storages. It is provided. In the present embodiment, in the hold display change mode storage unit 077AK3, the data indicating the display mode before the change of the hold display before the change, one by one from the final display mode in the order of the storage area 1 to the storage area 8, suggests the effect. Is stored in association with the data indicating whether or not the above is executed and the type of the suggestion effect, and the data indicating the effect mode of the suggestion effect. The data stored in the hold display change mode storage unit 077AK3 is the start port winning command storage unit 077AK1 or the second start opening winning command storage unit corresponding to the hold display to be announced. Among the starting port winning commands stored in 077AK2, the latest starting opening winning command (the starting opening winning command with the latest reception time) is stored in association with the command.

Hereinafter, it is determined in step 077AKS103 to execute the hold change effect, the final display mode of the hold display is determined in the fourth mode in step 077AKS110, and the current total number of hold storages is "4" in step 077AKS111. Based on this, "4" is set to the number of processes, and the number of processes is updated from "4" to "3" by subtracting 1 from the number of processes in step 077AKS112, and the number of processes is not "0" in step 077AKS113. Is determined, the processing of the first step 077AKS114 to step 077AKS117 is executed, and the final display mode of the hold display as the display mode after the change of the hold display (at the time of the shift of the last hold display (shift of the third hold display). Depending on the display mode of the hold display at the time), the hold display at the time of the shift of the hold display immediately before the shift of the last hold display before the change of the hold display (at the time of the second shift of the hold display) The display mode is determined to be the second aspect, and it is determined to execute the authenticity suggestion effect as the suggestion effect, the effect mode of the authenticity suggestion effect is determined to be the winning mode, and the appearance effect executed in the authenticity suggestion effect. The case where the number of attacking characters to appear is determined to be three will be described as an example.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-4, in step 077AKS106, the storage area 1 in the hold display change mode storage unit 077AK3 shows the fourth mode as the display mode of the hold display at the time of the last shift of the hold display. Data indicating that the genuine suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect in association with the data, and the suggestion effect is executed in the winning mode, and the suggestion effect appears in the appearance effect, and three attacking characters appear. Data indicating that it is executed and data are stored.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, the data stored in the hold display change mode storage unit 077AK3 is held in the first start opening winning command storage unit 077AK1 which has the latest reception time and corresponds to the hold display to be notified. It is stored in association with the start opening winning command stored in the storage area corresponding to the number "4".

Hereinafter, after the first processing of steps 077AKS114 to 077AKS117 is executed, the number of processing is updated from "3" to "2" by subtracting 1 from the number of processing in step 077AKS112, and the number of processing is "2" in step 077AKS113. It is determined that it is not "0", the processing of the second step 077AKS114 to the step 077AKS117 is executed, and the display mode determined in the processing of the first step 077AKS114 as the display mode after the change of the hold display (last hold). When the hold display is shifted two times before the last hold display shift as the display mode before the change of the hold display, depending on the display mode of the hold display when the hold display is shifted one before the display shift). The display mode of the hold display in (at the time of the first shift of the hold display) is determined to be the second mode, and it is decided to execute the Gase suggestion effect as the suggestion effect, and the effect mode of the Gase suggestion effect is determined to be the defeat mode. The case where the number of attacking characters appearing in the appearance effect executed in the Gase suggestion effect is determined to be two will be described as an example.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-4, in step 077AKS106, in the storage area 2 in the hold display change mode storage unit 077AK3, the hold display at the time of the shift of the hold display immediately before the shift of the last hold display is displayed. Data indicating that the Gase suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect in association with the data indicating the second aspect as the display mode, the suggestion effect is executed in the defeat mode, and the suggestion effect is executed in the appearance effect 2 Data indicating that the attacking character of a person is executed in an appearance manner and data are stored.

After the second processing of steps 077AKS114 to 077AKS117 is executed, the number of processing is updated from "2" to "1" by subtracting 1 from the number of processing in step 077AKS112, and the number of processing is "1" in step 077AKS113. It is determined that it is not "0", the processing of the third step 077AKS114 to the step 077AKS117 is executed, and the display mode determined in the processing of the second step 077AKS114 as the display mode after the change of the hold display (last hold). The display mode of the hold display when a start prize occurs as the display mode before the change of the hold display according to the display mode of the hold display at the time of the shift of the hold display two before the shift of the display is the first mode. The number of attacking characters appearing in the appearance effect executed in the authentic suggestion effect is determined to be the lightning strike mode, and the effect mode of the authentic suggestion effect is determined to be the lightning strike mode. The case where two people are determined will be described as an example.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-4, in step 077AKS106, in the storage area 3 in the hold display change mode storage unit 077AK3, the hold display at the time of the shift of the hold display two before the shift of the last hold display is displayed. Data indicating that the authentic suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect in association with the data indicating the second aspect as the display mode, the suggestion effect is executed in the lightning strike mode, and the suggestion effect is executed in the appearance effect 2 Data indicating that the attacking character of a person is executed in an appearance manner and data are stored.

Further, in this case, as shown in FIG. 10-4, in step 077AKS106, in response to the fact that the suggestion effect is not executed at the timing when the display of the hold display to be announced is started based on the occurrence of the start winning prize. In the storage area 4 of the hold display change mode storage unit 077AK3, data indicating that the suggestion effect is not executed is associated with the data showing the first mode as the hold display display mode when the start winning is generated. Be remembered.

Hereinafter, a case where the processing number of the third step 077AKS114 to 077AKS117 is executed and then the processing number is subtracted by 1 in step 077AKS112 to update from “1” to “0” will be described as an example. .. In this case, it is determined in step 077AKS113 that the number of processes is "0", and the process shifts to step 077AKS106.

In the present embodiment, according to the process as described above, the display mode before the change of the previous hold display is determined one by one from the final display mode, and the hold display change mode storage unit 077AK3 determines whether or not the suggestion effect is executed. The data indicating the type and the data indicating the effect mode of the suggestion effect are associated with each other and stored in the storage areas 1 to 8 in order.

Returning to FIG. 10-3, after executing the process of step 077AKS106, when the effect control CPU 120 generates the start winning prize determined in step 077AKS111 in the first hold display area AHB1 or the second hold display area AHB2. (Step 077AKS107). Specifically, in step 077AKS107, the effect control CPU 120 sets the display mode of the hold display when the start winning prize determined in step 077AKS111 occurs based on the data stored in the hold display change mode storage unit 077AK3. If the latest received start opening winning command, which is the start opening winning command corresponding to the hold display to be notified, is stored in the first starting opening winning command storage unit 077AK1, it is specified. When the hold display of the display mode is increased by 1 in the first hold display area AHB1 and the latest received start opening winning command is stored in the second starting opening winning command storage unit 077AK2, it is specified. The hold display of the displayed display mode is increased by 1 in the second hold display area AHB2. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 10-4, the effect control CPU 120 performs the first mode on hold display when a start winning prize occurs, based on the data stored in the storage area 4 of the hold display change mode storage unit 077AK3. First, based on the fact that the latest start opening winning command received is stored in the storage area corresponding to the hold number "4" in the first starting opening winning command storage unit 077AK1. In the hold display area AHB1, the hold display of the first aspect is increased by one.

Returning to FIG. 10-3, after executing the process of step 077AKS107, the effect control CPU 120 sets the hold change effect execution flag to the on state (step 077AKS108), and holds the hold change, which is the stored value of the hold change number counter. The number of times count value is set to the current total number of reserved storages (step 077AKS109), and the read-ahead notice setting process is terminated. The hold change number counter is provided in, for example, the above-mentioned effect control counter setting unit, and counts the number of times the hold change effect is executed.

In the variable display start setting process of step S171 of the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hold change effect execution flag is on, and determines that the hold change effect execution flag is on. If so, it is updated by subtracting 1 from the pending change count value. On the other hand, when it is determined that the holding change effect executing flag is not on, the effect control CPU 120 does not update the hold change number count value.

In the variable display start setting process of step S171, the effect control CPU 120 is among the start opening winning commands stored in the first starting opening winning command storage unit 077AK1 and the second starting opening winning command storage unit 077AK2. The first received start opening winning command (starting opening winning command with the oldest reception time) is deleted, and the start of the first starting opening winning command storage unit 077AK1 and the second starting opening winning command storage unit 077AK2 is started. Shift the contents of the storage area where the command at the time of winning a prize is deleted.

In the variable display effect processing in step S172 of the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hold change effect execution flag is on, and determines that the hold change effect execution flag is on. At that time, it is determined whether or not the change timing of the hold display (in the present embodiment, the timing at which the hold display is shifted and the variable display is started) has arrived. When it is determined that the change timing of the hold display has arrived, the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the suggestion effect in the determined mode, and also controls to change the display mode of the hold display to be announced to the determined display mode. I do.

Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 10-4, at the timing of the first shift of the hold display, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the data stored in the storage area 3 of the hold display change mode storage unit 077AK3. The "authenticity suggestion effect (lightning strike mode)" is executed in a mode in which two attacking characters appear in the appearance effect, and the display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed to the second mode. At the timing of the shift of the second hold display, the effect control CPU 120 produces a "gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)" based on the data stored in the storage area 2 of the hold display change mode storage unit 077AK3. It is executed in a mode in which two attacking characters appear in the above mode, and the display mode of the hold display to be notified is maintained in the second mode. At the timing of the third shift of the hold display (shift of the last hold display), the effect control CPU 120 determines the "authenticity suggestion effect (authentication suggestion effect) based on the data stored in the storage area 1 of the hold display change mode storage unit 077AK3. Victory mode) ”is executed in a mode in which three attacking characters appear in the appearance effect, and the display mode of the hold display to be announced is changed to the fourth mode as the final display mode.

In the effect processing during variable display in step S172, the effect control CPU 120 has a special figure variation which is a variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern based on the timer value of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example. Determine if time has passed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 is updated by subtracting 1 from the timer value of the effect control process timer, and the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated timer value of the effect control process timer. At that time, it may be determined that the special figure fluctuation time has elapsed. When it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time has elapsed, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hold change effect executing flag is on, and when it is determined that the hold change effect in progress flag is on, it is on hold. It is determined whether or not the change count value is 1. When it is determined that the hold change count value is 1, the effect control CPU 120 clears the hold change effect execution flag and sets it to the off state, and clears the hold change count value to be the initial value. Set to "0". With such a configuration, the hold change effect is based on the end of the variable display immediately before the variable display based on the hold display of the notice target (the variable display corresponding to the hold display of the notice target is started). And finish.

Hereinafter, an example of the effect operation according to the feature unit 077AK will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-10 to 10-12.

Specifically, hereinafter, by displaying a preview image on the screen of the image display device 5, a suggestion effect and a hold change effect are performed in a state in which the advance notice effect for notifying the jackpot expectation of the variable display being executed is being executed. The case where it is executed will be described as an example. Although not shown, FIGS. 10-10 (a) to 10-10 (c), 10-11 (a) to 10-11 (d), and 10-12 (a) to 10 will be described later. In the states shown in -12 (c), 10-12 (e), and 10-12 (f), the effect image (defense character image) related to the hold display, the active display, and the suggestion display is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A notice image is displayed together with AK1, an attack character image AK2 described later, a first message image AK3 described later, a thunder image AK4 described later, and a second message image AK5 to a sixth message image AK9 described later. It is running.

First, an example of the effect operation in the case where the hold change effect is executed after the "authenticity suggestion effect (lightning strike mode)" is executed will be described.

In FIG. 10-10 (a), variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5, and the active display is performed. In the area AHA, the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed in the first aspect. In the state shown in FIG. 10-10 (a), two hold displays (first hold display) are displayed in the first hold display area AHB1. Specifically, in the first hold display area AHB1, the hold display of the fourth aspect is displayed on the display part corresponding to the hold number "1", and the display part corresponding to the hold number "2" has the first aspect. The hold display is displayed.

In FIG. 10-10 (b), in the first hold display area AHB1 based on the occurrence of the first start winning, the hold display to be notified is displayed on the display portion corresponding to the hold number “3” in the second aspect. Is displayed, indicating the state in which the hold change effect has been started.

FIG. 10-10 (c) shows the hold of the fourth aspect, which was displayed on the display portion corresponding to the hold number "1" in the first hold display area AHB1 based on the start of the new variable display. The display is erased, and in the active display area AHA, the display of the active display corresponding to the erased hold display and the started variable display is started in the fourth mode, and the hold display is shifted. It shows the state where the appearance effect has started. In the state shown in FIG. 10-10 (c), the hold display of the second aspect, which is the hold display to be notified, is displayed on the display portion corresponding to the hold number "2" in the first hold display area AHB1. .. As shown in FIG. 10-10 (c), in the appearance effect, the attack character image AK2 representing the attack character is displayed in a mode showing the appearance of the attack character, and the first message representing the message "appearance" is displayed. The message image AK3 is displayed. FIG. 10-10 (c) shows an example of an effect operation when two attacking characters appear in the appearance effect. As shown in FIG. 10-10 (c), in the appearance effect, the effect images (hold display, active display, defense character image AK1, attack character image AK2, first message image AK3) are displayed in the first size. The sound effect is output at the first volume.

In the "authenticity suggestion effect (lightning strike mode)", the effect operation shown in FIGS. 10-10 (a) to 10-10 (c) is executed, and then the effect operation shown in FIG. 10-11 (a) is executed. NS. FIG. 10-11 (a) shows a state in which the appearance effect is completed and the lightning strike effect is being executed in the “authenticity suggestion effect (lightning strike mode)”. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (a), in the lightning strike effect, the lightning image AK4 representing the lightning is displayed in a mode showing how the lightning strikes on the hold display of the second mode which is the hold display to be notified. , The second message image AK5 representing the message "lightning strike" is displayed. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (a), in the lightning strike effect, the effect images (hold display, active display, defense character image AK1, attack character image AK2, lightning image AK4, second message image AK5) are in the second size. Is displayed, and the sound effect is output at the second volume.

When the lightning strike effect is completed and the "authenticity suggestion effect (lightning strike mode)" is completed, the effect operation shown in FIG. 10-11 (d) is executed. In FIG. 10-11 (d), the hold change effect is executed, and the display mode of the hold display of the notice target displayed on the display portion corresponding to the hold number “2” in the first hold display area AHB1 is the third mode. It shows the changed state to.

Next, an example of the effect operation in the case where the hold change effect is executed after the "authenticity suggestion effect (winning mode)" is executed will be described.

In the "authenticity suggestion effect (winning mode)", the effect operation shown in FIGS. 10-10 (a) to 10-10 (c) is executed, and then the effect operation shown in FIG. 10-11 (b) is executed. NS.

FIG. 10-11 (b) shows a state in which the appearance effect is completed and the battle effect is being executed in the “authenticity suggestion effect (victory mode)”. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (b), in the battle effect, the defense character image AK1 and the attack character image AK2 fight with the defense character represented by the defense character image AK1 and the attack character represented by the attack character image AK2. Is displayed, and the third message image AK6 representing the message "battle" is displayed. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (b), in the battle effect, the effect images (hold display, active display, defense character image AK1, attack character image AK2, third message image AK6) are displayed in the second size. The sound effect is output at the second volume.

FIG. 10-11 (c) shows a state in which the battle effect is completed and the victory effect is being executed in the “authenticity suggestion effect (victory mode)”. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (c), in the victory effect, the defense character image AK1 and the attack character image AK2 show how the attack character represented by the attack character image AK2 wins over the defense character represented by the defense character image AK1. In addition to being displayed in the mode, the fourth message image AK7 representing the message "victory" is displayed. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (c), in the victory effect, the effect images (hold display, active display, defense character image AK1, attack character image AK2, fourth message image AK7) are displayed in the second size. The sound effect is output at the second volume.

When the victory effect is completed and the "authenticity suggestion effect (victory mode)" is completed, the effect operation shown in FIG. 10-11 (d) is executed.

Next, an example of the effect operation when the "Gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)" is executed will be described.

In the "gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)", the effect operation shown in FIGS. 10-10 (a) to 10-10 (c) is executed, and then the effect operation shown in FIG. 10-12 (a) is executed. NS. FIG. 10-12 (a) shows a state in which the appearance effect is completed and the battle effect is being executed in the “Gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)”. The effect operation shown in FIG. 10-12 (a) is the same effect operation as the effect operation shown in FIG. 10-11 (b).

FIG. 10-12 (b) shows a state in which the battle effect is completed and the defeat effect is being executed in the “Gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)”. As shown in FIG. 10-12 (b), in the defeat effect, the defense character image AK1 and the attack character image AK2 show how the attack character represented by the attack character image AK2 is defeated by the defense character represented by the defense character image AK1. In addition to being displayed in a mode, the fifth message image AK8 representing the message "defeat" is displayed. As shown in FIG. 10-12 (b), in the defeat effect, the effect images (hold display, active display, defense character image AK1, attack character image AK2, fifth message image AK8) are displayed in the second size. The sound effect is output at the second volume.

When the defeat effect is completed and the "gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)" is completed, the effect operation shown in FIG. 10-12 (c) is executed. In FIG. 10-12 (c), the hold change effect is not executed, and the display mode of the hold display of the notice target displayed on the display portion corresponding to the hold number "2" in the first hold display area AHB1 is the second. It shows the state maintained in the aspect.

FIG. 10-12 shows the effect operation shown in FIG. 10-12 (d) after the effect operation shown in FIG. 10-12 (c) is executed when the “gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)” is executed. Is shown as an example of the effect operation when is executed. In FIG. 10-12 (d), the hold display of the notice target is deleted in the first hold display area AHB1, and the active display corresponding to the deleted hold display of the notice target is displayed in the active display area AHA. Indicates the state of being. In the state shown in FIG. 10-12 (d), the image display device 5 has a variable display display result corresponding to the active display displayed in the active display area AHA based on the deleted pending display of the notice target. The jackpot symbol ("777") is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right".

Next, an example of the effect operation when the "Gase suggestion effect (retreat mode)" is executed will be described.

In the "gase suggestion effect (retreat mode)", after the effect operation shown in FIGS. 10-10 (a) to 10-10 (c) is executed, the effect operation shown in FIG. 10-12 (e) is executed. NS. FIG. 10-12 (e) shows a state in which the appearance effect is completed and the retreat effect is being executed in the “Gase suggestion effect (retreat mode)”. As shown in FIG. 10-12 (e), in the retreat effect, the attack character image AK2 is displayed in a manner showing how the attack character retreats, and the sixth message image AK9 representing the message "retreat" is displayed. Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 10-12 (e), in the retreat effect, the effect images (hold display, active display, defense character image AK1, attack character image AK2, sixth message image AK9) are displayed in the first size. The sound effect is output at the first volume.

When the retreat effect is completed and the "gase suggestion effect (retreat mode)" is completed, the effect operation shown in FIG. 10-12 (f) is executed. In FIG. 10-12 (f), the hold change effect is not executed, and the display mode of the hold display of the notice target displayed on the display portion corresponding to the hold number "2" in the first hold display area AHB1 is the second. It shows the state maintained in the aspect. The effect operation shown in FIG. 10-12 (f) is the same effect operation as the effect operation shown in FIG. 10-12 (c).

FIG. 10-12 shows the effect operation shown in FIG. 10-12 (g) after the effect operation shown in FIG. 10-12 (f) is executed when the “gase suggestion effect (retreat mode)” is executed. Is shown as an example of the effect operation when is executed. In FIG. 10-12 (g), the hold display of the notice target is deleted in the first hold display area AHB1, and the active display corresponding to the deleted hold display of the notice target is displayed in the active display area AHA. Indicates the state of being. In the state shown in FIG. 10-12 (g), the image display device 5 has a variable display display result corresponding to the active display displayed in the active display area AHA based on the deleted pending display of the notice target. Lost symbols ("767") are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right".

As described above, in the feature unit 077AK according to the present embodiment, when the Gase suggestion effect as the second suggestion effect is executed in the retreat mode as the first effect mode, it becomes the target of the Gase suggestion effect. The expectation that the jackpot game state as an advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display corresponding to the hold display as the suggestion display is concerned when the Gase suggestion effect is executed in the defeat mode as the second effect mode. It is different from the degree of expectation that is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the variable display corresponding to the suggestion display that is the target of the Gase suggestion effect. According to such a configuration, when the Gase suggestion effect is executed, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode of the Gase suggestion effect, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, the feature unit 077AK is configured to be able to display the hold display in any one of a plurality of types of display modes including the first display mode as the first mode and the second display mode as the second display mode. When the hold display is displayed in the second mode, the Gase suggestion effect targeting the hold display can be executed in the defeat mode, while the hold display is other than the second mode including the first mode. When it is displayed in the display mode of, it is configured so that the Gase suggestion effect targeting the hold display is not executed in the defeat mode. That is, when the hold display is displayed in the second mode, the hold display is displayed at a higher rate than when the hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the second mode including the first mode. It is configured so that the target Gase suggestion effect can be executed in a defeat mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display mode of the hold display and improve the game interest.

Further, in the feature unit 077AK, when the hold display is displayed in the second mode as the second display mode, the hold display includes the defense character image AK1 as an additional image, and the hold display is the second mode. When the Gase suggestion effect targeting the hold display is executed in the defeat mode, the Gase suggestion effect is executed in a mode that acts on the defense character image AK1. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In addition, in the feature unit 077AK, in any of the "genuine suggestion effect (victory mode)", "genuine suggestion effect (lightning strike mode)", "gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)", and "gase suggestion effect (retreat mode)". , Depending on which effect mode the appearance effect is executed (depending on the number of attacking characters appearing in the appearance effect), which of the authentic suggestion effect and the Gase suggestion effect is executed. The ratio of being done is different. That is, in the feature unit 077AK, when the Gase suggestion effect is executed in the defeated mode, the Gase suggestion effect can be executed in a manner partially common to the genuine suggestion effect as the first suggestion effect. There are a plurality of types of common modes, and the ratio of which of the genuine suggestion effect and the Gase suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of the common mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the types of common modes and improve the game interest.

Further, in the feature unit 077AK, when the Gase suggestion effect is executed in the defeat mode, the player can easily recognize the Gase suggestion effect as compared with the case where the Gase suggestion effect is executed in the retreat mode. It is configured to be executable. According to such a configuration, when the Gase suggestion effect is executed in the defeat mode, the player can compare that the Gase suggestion effect is executed in the retreat mode. It can be made easier to recognize.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and is shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a part of the configuration.

In the above embodiment, it has been described that the suggestion display is a hold display. However, this is only an example, and the suggestion display may be an arbitrary effect image that is displayed corresponding to the variable display and suggests the degree of expectation that is controlled to the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display. For example, the suggestion display may be an active display. In this case, an active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display to a mode different from the normal mode (for example, the first mode) (for example, the second mode to the fifth mode) is executed as the change effect, and the active change effect is performed. A suggestion effect that is executed and suggests that the display mode of the active display may change may be configured to be feasible.

In addition, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests that the hold change effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display changes, and a suggestion effect that suggests that the active change effect is executed and the display mode of the active display changes. In the case of configuration, the suggestion effect in which the hold display is the suggestion target may be executed in a mode different from the suggestion effect in which the active display is the suggestion target. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. For example, the suggestion effect in which the hold display is the suggestion target is executed in a manner in which the attack character represented by the attack character image AK2 attacks the hold display with a sword, while the suggestion effect in which the active display is the suggestion target is performed by the attack character. May execute the active display in a manner of attacking with a spear.

In the above embodiment, the hold display has been described as being displayed in any of five display modes (first to fifth modes). However, this is only an example, and the display mode of the hold display may be 4 or less types, or 6 or more types.

In the above-described embodiment, the authenticity suggestion effect has been described as being executed in any of the victory mode and the lightning strike mode. However, this is only an example, and at least one or more production modes different from those of the victory mode and the lightning strike mode may be provided as the production mode of the authenticity suggestion effect. For example, as a production mode of the authenticity suggestion effect, an appearance effect is performed, a battle effect is performed, a defeat effect is executed, and then the attack character that was once defeated in the defeat effect is revived and becomes a defense character again. A relief mode, which is a production mode in which a battle is performed and a victory is achieved, may be provided. Alternatively, as an effect mode of the authenticity suggestion effect, a special mode in which lightning falls on the hold display of the notice target when the appearing attack character and the defense character are fighting after the appearance effect is performed. It may be provided. It is preferable that the effect time of the authenticity suggestion effect of the special aspect is set shorter than both the effect time of the "authenticity suggestion effect (victory mode)" and the effect time of the "authenticity suggestion effect (lightning strike mode)".

In the above embodiment, when the hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the second mode, it is assumed that the authenticity suggestion effect targeting the hold display is executed in the lightning strike mode and not in the victory mode. explained. However, this is only an example, and when the hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the second mode, the authenticity suggestion effect targeting the hold display can be executed in the victory mode. It may be configured. For example, when the hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the second mode including the first mode, the hold display is displayed in the second mode with the authenticity suggestion effect targeting the hold display. In some cases, the authenticity suggestion effect targeting the hold display is executed in the winning mode at a rate lower than the winning mode (for example, 60%) and higher than 0% (for example, 40%). You may. That is, when the hold display is displayed in the second mode, the hold display is displayed at a higher rate than when the hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the second mode including the first mode. The authenticity suggestion effect targeting the above may be configured to be feasible in the winning mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display mode of the hold display and improve the game interest.

When the hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the second mode, the authenticity suggestion effect targeting the hold display can be executed in the victory mode, which is an effect mode that acts on the defense character image AK1. In the case of the above configuration, the hold display of the display mode other than the second mode may also include the defense character image AK1. In this case, the hold display of the display mode other than the second mode is displayed in the display mode including the defense character image AK1 only during the suggestion effect period in which the suggestion effect is executed, while defense is performed during the period other than the suggestion effect period. It may be displayed in a display mode that does not include the character image AK1. Alternatively, the hold display of the display mode other than the second aspect may be displayed in the display mode including the defense character image AK1 in both the suggestion effect period and the period other than the suggestion effect period. ..

In the above-described embodiment, the Gase suggestion effect has been described as being executed in any of a defeat mode and a retreat mode. However, this is only an example, and at least one or more production modes different from both the defeat mode and the retreat mode may be provided as the production mode of the Gase suggestion effect. For example, as an effect mode of the Gase suggestion effect, an attack character may appear, and the appearing attack character may provide an effect mode of discarding the weapon held in the hand.

In the above embodiment, when the hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the second mode, it is assumed that the Gase suggestion effect targeting the hold display is executed in the retreat mode and not in the defeat mode. explained. However, this is only an example, and when the hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the second mode, the Gase suggestion effect targeting the hold display can be executed in the defeat mode. It may be configured. For example, when the hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the second mode including the first mode, the hold display is displayed in the second mode with the Gase suggestion effect targeting the hold display. In some cases, the Gase suggestion effect targeting the hold display is executed in the defeat mode at a rate lower than the rate of executing the defeat mode (for example, 60%) and higher than 0% (for example, 40%). You may. That is, when the hold display is displayed in the second mode, the hold display is displayed at a higher rate than when the hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the second mode including the first mode. The Gase suggestion effect targeting the above may be configured to be feasible in a defeat mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display mode of the hold display and improve the game interest.

When the hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the second mode, the Gase suggestion effect targeting the hold display can be executed in the defeat mode, which is an effect mode that acts on the defense character image AK1. In the case of the above configuration, the hold display of the display mode other than the second mode may also include the defense character image AK1. In this case, the hold display of the display mode other than the second aspect is displayed in the display mode including the defense character image AK1 only during the suggestion effect period, while the defense character image AK1 is not included in the period other than the suggestion effect period. It may be displayed in a display mode. Alternatively, the hold display of the display mode other than the second aspect may be displayed in the display mode including the defense character image AK1 in both the suggestion effect period and the period other than the suggestion effect period. ..

In the above embodiment, "genuine suggestion effect (victory mode)", "genuine suggestion effect (lightning strike mode)", "gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)", and "gase suggestion effect (retreat mode)" are all included. It has been described that the targeted hold display is executed in a manner recognizable by the player. However, this is only an example, and the suggestion effect may be executed in a manner in which the player cannot recognize or recognize the target hold display. For example, the "Gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)" is executed in a mode that the player can recognize the target hold display, while the "Gase suggestion effect (retreat mode)" is the target hold display. May be executed in a mode in which the player is difficult to recognize or cannot recognize (for example, after the attacking character appears, the player retreats without approaching the target hold display).

In the above embodiment, it has been described that the authenticity suggestion effect can be executed in the winning mode only when the hold display is displayed in one type of display mode (second mode). However, this is only an example, and the authenticity suggestion effect is won only when the hold display is displayed in any one of a plurality of predetermined display modes (for example, the second mode and the third mode). It may be possible to carry out in an embodiment.

In the above embodiment, it has been described that the Gase suggestion effect can be executed in the defeat mode only when the hold display is displayed in one type of display mode (second mode). However, this is only an example, and the Gase suggestion effect is defeated only when the hold display is displayed in any one of a plurality of predetermined display modes (for example, the second mode and the third mode). It may be possible to carry out in an embodiment.

In the above embodiment, in the "Gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)", the battle effect and the defeat effect in which the effect image is displayed in the second size and the sound effect is output in the second volume are executed, while the "defeat effect" is executed. In the "Gase suggestion effect (retreat mode)", the effect image is displayed in the first size and the sound effect is output at the first volume. It was explained that it is configured so that it can be easily recognized by the player as compared with the "gase suggestion effect (retreat mode)". However, this is only an example, and the "Gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)" can be executed in any mode that is easier for the player to recognize than the "Gase suggestion effect (retreat mode)".

For example, in the "Gase suggestion effect (retreat mode)", the effect image is displayed at the first position on the screen of the image display device 5, while in the "Gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)", the effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. By displaying the effect image in the second position, which is easier for the player to recognize than the first position, the "Gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)" is compared to the "Gase suggestion effect (retreat mode)" by the player. It may be configured to be easily recognized. As a specific example of the first position, only the first distance from the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" that the player is paying attention to almost all the time during the game. A distant position can be mentioned, and specific examples of the second position include a second position smaller than the first distance from the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Positions separated by a distance (positions closer to the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" than the first position) can be mentioned.

Alternatively, in the "Gase suggestion effect (retreat mode)", the predetermined effect is not executed, while in the "Gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)", the "Gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)" is changed to "Gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)". It may be configured so that it can be easily recognized by the player as compared with "Gase suggestion effect (retreat mode)". The predetermined effect may be performed in any manner such as displaying an image, outputting sound, lighting a lamp (for example, a 7-segment LED), operating an accessory, or a combination thereof.

In the above embodiment, it has been described that the ratio of which of the genuine suggestion effect and the Gase suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the number of attacking characters appearing in the appearance effect. However, this is only an example, and it can be configured in any form so that the ratio of which of the genuine suggestion effect and the Gase suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the effect mode of the appearance effect. For example, one of a plurality of types of attack characters can be made to appear in the appearance effect, and either the genuine suggestion effect or the Gase suggestion effect is executed according to the type of the attack character that appeared in the appearance effect. The ratio may be different.

In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that in the hold change effect, the display mode of the hold display can be changed each time the hold display shifts and the timing for starting the variable display arrives. However, this is only an example, and the display mode of the hold display can be changed at an arbitrary timing in the hold change effect. For example, in the hold change effect, the display mode of the hold display may be changed at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or the like) has elapsed after the hold display is shifted.

In the above embodiment, it has been described that the suggestion effect can be executed every time the hold display shift timing as the change timing of the hold display comes after the hold change effect is started. However, this is only an example, and the suggestion effect can be executed at any timing. For example, the suggestion effect may be made executable at the timing when the display of the hold display to be notified is started based on the occurrence of the start prize and the hold change effect is started.

In the above embodiment, the CPU 103 included in the main board 11 performs a look-ahead determination for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a "big hit", and the winning determination result command indicating the result of the look-ahead determination is the main. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12, and in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold change effect and the suggestion effect based on the result of the look-ahead determination indicated by the received winning determination result command. Explained as. However, this is only an example, and the effect control CPU 120 performs a look-ahead determination on the effect control board 12 to determine whether or not the display result of the variable display is a "big hit", and the effect control CPU 120 determines the look-ahead. Based on the result of, the pending change effect and the suggestion effect may be executed. For example, in the start prize determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process, a random number value is extracted by the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of the start prize, and an effect control command indicating the extracted random value is mainly used. It is configured to be transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12, and on the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 displays a variable display based on the start winning prize based on the random value indicated by the received effect control command. A look-ahead determination for determining whether or not the result is a "big hit" may be performed, and a hold change effect and a suggestion effect may be executed according to the result of the look-ahead determination.

In the above embodiment, it has been described that the hold change effect targeting the other hold display is not executed during the period during which the hold change effect targeting one hold display is being executed. However, this is only an example, and a hold change effect targeting at least one or more other hold displays may be executed during the period during which the hold change effect targeting one hold display is being executed. .. That is, a plurality of hold displays may be configured to be able to execute the hold change effect as a notice target at the same time.

In the above-described embodiment, in the effect operation example shown in FIGS. 10-10 to 10-12, it has been described that the suggestion effect and the hold change effect are executed when the advance notice effect is executed. However, this is only an example, and the suggestion effect and the hold change effect can be executed when an arbitrary effect for displaying the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is being executed. For example, the reach effect is executed by displaying a predetermined effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the suggestion effect and the hold change effect are executed when the reach effect is executed. You may.

In the above embodiment, it is shown that the winning determination result command received based on the occurrence of the starting winning is determined by the look-ahead determination when the display result of the variable display based on the starting winning is "big hit". Depending on which of the effect control command and the effect control command indicating that the pre-reading judgment has determined that the display result of the variable display based on the start winning is other than "big hit", the hold change effect It was explained as determining whether or not to execute. However, this is only an example, and whether or not the pending change effect is executed can be determined by any method.

For example, when a start-up prize is generated, it may be determined whether or not to execute the hold change effect according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) of the variable display based on the start-up prize. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the hold change effect is executed, and to improve the game interest.

Specifically, when the variable display pattern of the variable display based on the start winning is a variable display pattern in which the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed, the variable display pattern of the variable display based on the start winning is the reach effect that becomes the normal reach. May be determined to execute the hold change effect at a higher rate than in the case of the variable display pattern in which is executed. Further, when the variable display pattern of the variable display based on the start winning is a variable display pattern in which the reach effect that becomes the normal reach is executed, the variable display pattern of the variable display based on the start winning is the variable display pattern in which the reach effect is not executed. It may be decided to execute the hold change effect at a higher rate than in the case of. With such a configuration, when the hold change effect is executed, the variable display based on the hold display to be announced becomes normal reach at a higher rate than the rate of execution in the variable display pattern in which the reach effect is not executed. Variable display in which the reach effect that becomes super reach is executed at a higher rate than the ratio that is executed in the variable display pattern in which the reach effect is executed and the reach effect that becomes normal reach is executed. It is executed by the pattern.

In this case, in the start prize determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process, a random number value is extracted by the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of the start prize, and the start is based on the extracted random number value. A look-ahead determination for determining a variable display pattern of variable display based on a prize is performed by the CPU 103, and an effect control command indicating the result of the look-ahead determination is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, and the effect is produced on the effect control board 12. The control CPU 120 may determine whether or not to execute the hold change effect based on the result of the look-ahead determination indicated by the received effect control command.

The effect control CPU 120 performs a look-ahead determination for determining the variable display pattern on the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the hold change effect based on the result of the pre-reading determination. You may. For example, in the start prize determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process, a random number value is extracted by the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of the start prize, and an effect control command indicating the extracted random value is mainly used. It is configured to be transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12, and in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 can change the variable display based on the start winning prize based on the random value indicated by the received effect control command. A look-ahead determination for determining a display pattern may be performed, and whether or not to execute the hold change effect may be determined according to the result of the look-ahead determination.

In the above embodiment, it is shown that the winning determination result command received based on the occurrence of the starting winning is determined by the look-ahead determination when the display result of the variable display based on the starting winning is "big hit". Depending on which of the effect control command and the effect control command indicating that the pre-reading judgment has determined that the display result of the variable display based on the start winning is other than "big hit", the hold change effect It has been described as determining the final display mode of the hold display that is the subject of the advance notice. However, this is only an example, and the final display mode of the hold display to be notified can be determined by any method.

For example, when a start-up prize occurs, the final display mode of the hold display of the notice target corresponding to the start-up prize may be determined according to the variable display pattern of the variable display based on the start-up prize. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the final display mode of the hold display and improve the game interest.

Specifically, when the variable display pattern of the variable display based on the start winning is the variable display pattern in which the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed, the final display mode of the hold display is determined as the fifth mode, and the start winning is given. When the variable display pattern of the variable display based on the variable display pattern is the variable display pattern in which the reach effect that becomes the normal reach is executed, the final display mode of the hold display is determined as the fourth mode, and the variable display pattern of the variable display based on the start winning prize is In the case of a variable display pattern in which the reach effect is not executed, the final display mode of the hold display may be determined to be one of the first mode to the third mode. With such a configuration, when the final display mode of the hold display is the fifth mode, the notice target is at a higher rate than when the final display mode of the hold display is any of the first to fourth modes. The variable display based on the hold display of is executed in the variable display pattern in which the super reach effect is executed. Further, when the final display mode of the hold display is the fourth mode, the hold display to be notified is set at a higher rate than when the final display mode of the hold display is any of the first to third modes. The variable display based on the variable display is executed in the variable display pattern in which the reach effect that becomes the normal reach is executed.

Alternatively, when a start-up prize occurs, if it is determined by the look-ahead judgment that the display result of the variable display based on the start-up prize is a "big hit", a notice target corresponding to the start-up prize is given according to the big hit type. The final display mode of the hold display may be determined. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the final display mode of the hold display and improve the game interest.

Specifically, a plurality of jackpot types having different advantages for the player (for example, the number of rounds, the length of the open upper limit period, the presence or absence of processing for controlling the jackpot game state to the probabilistic state after the end of the jackpot game state, etc.) are provided. When the look-ahead judgment determines that the display result of the variable display based on the start winning is "big hit", when the big hit type is the specific big hit type as the big hit type with the highest advantage, the final display mode of the hold display is set. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a jackpot type other than the specific jackpot type, the final display mode of the hold display may be determined to be one of the third to fifth aspects. With such a configuration, when the final display mode of the hold display in the hold change effect is the second mode, if the display result of the variable display based on the hold display is a "big hit", the jackpot with the highest advantage is given. It is controlled to the type of jackpot game state. According to such a configuration, when the final display mode of the hold display in the hold change effect is the second mode having the lowest expectation of big hit among the second to fifth modes, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest. ..

In this case, in the start prize determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process, a random number value is extracted by the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of the start prize, and the start is based on the extracted random number value. The CPU 103 makes a look-ahead determination to determine whether or not the display result of the variable display based on the winning is a "big hit" and the big hit type, and an effect control command indicating the result of the look-ahead determination is an effect control from the main board 11. It may be transmitted to the board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the final display mode of the hold display on the effect control board 12 based on the result of the look-ahead determination indicated by the received effect control command.

The effect control CPU 120 performs a look-ahead determination on the effect control board 12 to determine whether or not the display result of the variable display is a "big hit" and the jackpot type, and the effect control CPU 120 determines the look-ahead. Based on the result, the final display mode of the hold display may be determined. For example, in the start prize determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process, a random number value is extracted by the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of the start prize, and an effect control command indicating the extracted random value is mainly used. It is configured to be transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12, and on the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 displays a variable display based on the start winning prize based on the random value indicated by the received effect control command. A look-ahead determination for determining whether or not the result is a "big hit" and a jackpot type may be performed, and the display mode of the hold display may be determined according to the result of the look-ahead determination.

In the above embodiment, whether or not the display mode before the change of the hold display is the second mode, and the winning determination result command is determined by the look-ahead determination that the display result of the variable display is "big hit". Depending on which of the effect control command indicating that the display result of the variable display is other than "big hit" and the effect control command indicating that the pre-reading judgment is determined, the effect of the authenticity suggestion effect is produced. The mode has been described as determining one of a winning mode and a lightning strike mode. However, this is only an example, and the production mode of the authenticity suggestion effect can be determined by any method.

For example, the production mode of the authenticity suggestion effect may be determined according to the gaming state. Specifically, when the game is controlled to a game state other than the time saving state, the effect mode of the authenticity suggestion effect can be determined to be either a victory mode or a lightning strike mode, while the special figure fluctuates more than the normal state. When the time is controlled to be short, the effect mode of the authenticity suggestion effect may be determined to be a lightning strike mode in which the effect time is shorter than that of the victory mode, and may not be determined to be the victory mode. According to such a configuration, the suggestion effect can be executed in a suitable manner according to the gaming state.

In the above embodiment, as the display mode of the hold display, a display mode that can be changed only when the "authenticity suggestion effect (victory mode)" is executed and a display mode that can be changed only when the "authenticity suggestion effect (lightning strike mode)" is executed. At least one of the display modes that can be changed only in the above may be provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the production mode of the suggestion effect and improve the game interest.

For example, a first special mode and a second special mode are provided as display modes of the hold display, and when the "authenticity suggestion effect (winning mode)" is executed, the display mode of the hold display is the first by the hold change effect. While it is possible to change to a special mode, when the "authenticity suggestion effect (lightning strike mode)" is executed, the display mode of the hold display is configured not to change to the first special mode by the hold change effect, and the "authenticity suggestion effect" is performed. When "(Lightning strike mode)" is executed, the display mode of the hold display can be changed to the second special mode by the hold change effect, while when "Authenticity suggestion effect (victory mode)" is executed, it is held by the hold change effect. The display mode of the display may be configured so as not to change to the second special mode. Specifically, in step 077AKS117, when the display mode of the hold display after the change is the first special mode, the effect mode of the authenticity suggestion effect is determined as the winning mode, and the display mode of the hold display after the change is the second special mode. When it is a mode, the effect mode of the authenticity suggestion effect may be determined as the lightning strike mode. That is, the effect mode of the suggestion effect may be determined according to the display mode of the hold display after the change.

In the above-described embodiment, when a plurality of types of second modes are provided and the Gase suggestion effect is executed for the hold display of the second mode, the Gase suggestion is performed in different effect modes depending on the type of the second mode. You may try to perform the production. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. Specifically, a plurality of types of second modes are provided, and the hold display of the second mode is configured to include a defense character image AK1 representing different types of defense characters depending on the type of the second mode. When the Gase suggestion effect targeting the two modes of hold display is executed in the defeat mode, which is a mode that acts on the defense character image AK1, the defense represented by the defense character image AK1 included in the hold display of the second mode is performed. The Gase suggestion effect may be executed in an effect mode according to the type of character. For example, when the "Gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)" is executed for the hold display of the second aspect, when the hold display of the second mode includes the defense character image AK1 representing one defense character, In the "Gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)", the attack character executes the battle effect in a mode of attacking the one defense character with a sword, while the defense representing another defense character on the hold display of the second mode. When the character image AK1 is included, in the "Gase suggestion effect (defeat mode)", the battle effect may be executed in a mode in which the attacking character attacks the other defense character with a spear.

In the above embodiment, it has been described that the special figure game is executed according to the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. However, this is only an example, and the second special figure game may be executed with priority over the first special figure game (so-called special figure 2 priority digestion). If the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game, and if the time is controlled to be shortened, the pre-reading notice setting process is performed when the second start prize is generated. On the other hand, when the first start prize is generated, the read-ahead notice setting process is not executed, and when the game is controlled to the normal state, the read-ahead notice setting process is executed when the first start prize is generated. On the other hand, it may be configured not to execute the look-ahead notice setting process when the second start winning is generated. In this case, the hold display change mode storage unit 077AK3 has four storage areas (storage areas 1 to 4) corresponding to "4" which is the upper limit of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number. Should be provided.

Any part or all of each of the above configurations can be combined with each other in any way.

Each configuration relating to the feature portion 077AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to the other feature portion. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

For example, the feature unit 048AK and the feature unit 063AK may be introduced into the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 077AK. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 077AK, when the setting suggestion effect in the feature unit 063AK is not performed in the ending effect, the setting suggestion effect by the stop symbol in the feature unit 048AK may be executed. Further, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 077AK, when the setting suggestion effect of the aspect 1 in the feature unit 063AK is executed in the ending effect, the setting suggestion effect in the feature unit 048AK may be further executed. In that case, the setting suggestion effect in the feature unit 048AK may be executed with reference to a table different from that in FIG. 8-23. That is, it is set to a high setting so as not to suggest that it is set to an unfavorable setting value even though it is suggested to be set to an advantageous setting value in the first aspect. The setting suggestion effect in the feature unit 048AK may be executed with reference to the table in which the determination ratio is set for the mode suggesting that the condition is present. According to this, it is suggested that both the setting suggestion effect in the feature unit 063AK and the setting suggestion effect in the feature unit 048AK are set to advantageous setting values, which gives the player a sense of expectation. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 077AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 077AK is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
A change effect (for example, a hold display) that is displayed corresponding to the variable display and suggests an expectation degree (for example, a jackpot expectation degree) that is controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display. For example, a change effect executing means (for example, FIG. 10-3, FIG. 10-5, FIG. 10-10, FIG. 10-11, etc.) capable of executing a hold change effect, etc.
The first suggestion effect execution means (for example, FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4) capable of executing the first suggestion effect (for example, a genuine suggestion effect) suggesting that the change effect is executed and the mode of the suggestion display is changed. , Fig. 10-8 to Fig. 10-11, etc.)
A second suggestion effect execution means (for example, FIGS. 10-1 to 10-) capable of executing a second suggestion effect (for example, a Gase suggestion effect) suggesting that the change effect is not executed and the mode of the suggestion display does not change. 4. Fig. 10-8 to Fig. 10-10, Fig. 10-12, etc.)
With
The second suggestion effect executing means has a plurality of types of effect modes including at least a first effect mode (for example, a retreat mode) and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode (for example, a defeat mode). The second suggestion effect can be executed in any of these (for example, FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, 10-9, 10-10, 10-12, etc.).
When the second suggestion effect execution means executes the second suggestion effect in the first effect mode, the advantageous state is obtained based on the variable display corresponding to the suggestion display that is the target of the second suggestion effect. A variable display of the controlled expectation degree corresponding to the suggestion display that is the target of the second suggestion effect when the second suggestion effect execution means executes the second suggestion effect in the second effect mode. To be different from the expected degree controlled in the advantageous state based on (for example, FIG. 10-1, FIG. 10-9, etc.).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the second suggestion effect is executed, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode of the second suggestion effect, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, which relates to the feature unit 077AK.
The suggestion is made in any one of a plurality of types of display modes including at least a first display mode (for example, the first mode) and a second display mode different from the first display mode (for example, the second mode). The display can be displayed (eg Figure 10-1) and
The second suggestion effect executing means, when the suggestion display is displayed in the second display mode, has a higher ratio than when the suggestion display is displayed in the first display mode. The second suggestion effect for the suggestion display can be executed in the second effect mode (for example, FIG. 10-9).
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display mode of the suggestion display and improve the game interest.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above, which relates to the feature unit 077AK.
When the suggestion display is displayed in the second display mode, the suggestion display includes an additional image (for example, defense character image AK1 or the like) (for example, FIG. 10-1).
When the suggestion display is displayed in the second display mode, the second suggestion effect means performs the second suggestion effect targeting the suggestion display in the second display mode. The second suggestion effect can be performed in a manner that acts on the additional image (for example, FIG. 10-12).
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(4) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (1) to (3) according to the feature unit 077AK,
When the second suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode, the second suggestion effect execution means can execute the second suggestion effect in a mode partially common to the first suggestion effect. (For example, FIG. 10-1, FIG. 10-2, FIG. 10-10, FIG. 10-11, etc.).
There are a plurality of types of the common modes (for example, FIG. 10-9).
Depending on the type of the common aspect, the ratio of which of the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect is executed differs (for example, FIG. 10-9).
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the types of common modes and improve the game entertainment.

(5) In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines (1) to (4) according to the feature unit 077AK,
When the second suggestion effect execution means executes the second suggestion effect in the second effect mode, the second suggestion effect is executed in the first effect mode. It can be executed in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize (for example, FIG. 10-2, FIG. 10-11, FIG. 10-12, etc.).
You may do so.
According to such a configuration, when the second suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode, the second suggestion effect is executed in the first effect mode. It can be easier for the player to recognize than sometimes.

1 Pachinko game machine 5 Image display device 103 ROM
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information,
Corresponding display means capable of displaying correspondence display based on hold information stored in the holding storage means, and
A change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect that changes the mode of the corresponding display,
A first suggestion effect execution means capable of executing the first suggestion effect suggesting that the change effect is executed and the mode of the corresponding display changes.
A second suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a second suggestion effect suggesting that the change effect is not executed and the mode of the corresponding display does not change.
With
The corresponding display includes at least a first display mode and a second display mode different from the first display mode.
The second suggestion effect execution means is
The second suggestion effect can be executed in any one of a plurality of types of effect modes including at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode.
When the corresponding display is displayed in the second display mode, the second suggestive effect is displayed in the second effect mode at a higher rate than when the corresponding display is displayed in the first display mode. executable der is,
When the second suggestion effect execution means executes the second suggestion effect in the first effect mode, the advantageous state is obtained based on the variable display corresponding to the corresponding display that is the target of the second suggestion effect. A variable display corresponding to the corresponding display that is the target of the second suggestion effect when the second suggestion effect execution means executes the second suggestion effect in the second effect mode. Different from the expectation controlled to the advantageous state based on
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images